Docslide - Us Optix Osn 1500 v100r008 Product Description

Product Description
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

System
V100R008
Issue
02
Date
2008-03-29
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service.
Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Commercial in Confidence
Page 2 of 243
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

Product Description
About This Document

Author
Prepared by
Date
Reviewed by
Date
Approved by
Date
Summary
This document includes:
Chapter
Details
1 Network Application
Describes the OptiX OSN 1500 and its position in the

network.
2 Function
This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiX

OSN 1500 in the terms of capacity, interface, built-in WDM
technology, ROP system, REG, protection, TCM and
network management.
3 Hardware
Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptable

cabinet installation of the OptiX OSN 1500.
4 Software
Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 1500. It

includes intelligent software, board software, NE software
and NM software.
5 Data Features
Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of the

OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of function, application and
protection.
6 DCN Features
This chapter describes the DCN feature supported by the

OptiX OSN 1500.
7 ASON Features
This chapter introduces the ASON features of the OptiX

OSN 1500 in terms of service classes and application.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 3 of 243

Product Description
Chapter
Details
8 Protection
Describes protection modes (including equipment level

and network level) and characteristics supported by the
OptiX OSN 1500.
9 Clock
This chapter describes the clock function of the OptiX

OSN 1500.
10 OAM
This chapter describes main technical characteristics of

the OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of maintenance and
centralized management.
11 Security
Management
This chapter describes main technical characteristics of

the OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of safe operation.
12 Technical
Specifications
This chapter describes the interface specifications,

transmission performance and environment requirements
for the OptiX OSN 1500.
A Compliant
Standards
This appendix lists international standards to which the

OptiX OSN 1500 conforms in terms of design and
performance.
B Basic Principle
This appendix lists the basic principle of several

technologies which the OptiX OSN 1500 adopts.
C Glossary
This appendix lists the terms used in this document.
D Acronyms and
Abbreviations
The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used

in this document.
History
Issue
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Details
Date
Author
Approved by
Page 4 of 243

Product Description
Contents
1 Network Application ..................................................................................................... 11
2 Function.........................................................................................................................15
2.1 Capacity ......................................................................................................................................... 15
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity........................................................................................................ 15
2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity ............................................................................................................. 15
2.2 Service ........................................................................................................................................... 18
2.2.1 SDH Services ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.2 PDH Services ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.3 Ethernet Services .................................................................................................................. 18
2.2.4 RPR Services ........................................................................................................................ 18
2.2.5 ATM Services......................................................................................................................... 19
2.2.6 DDN Services ........................................................................................................................ 19
2.2.7 SAN Services ........................................................................................................................ 19
2.2.8 Service Access Capacity ....................................................................................................... 19
2.3 Interface ......................................................................................................................................... 20
2.3.1 Service Interfaces.................................................................................................................. 20
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces.................................................................................. 21
2.4 Networking ..................................................................................................................................... 22
2.5 Built-in WDM Technology ............................................................................................................... 24
2.6 External Clock Output Shutdown Function .................................................................................... 25
2.7 110 V/220 V Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 25
2.8 REG Function................................................................................................................................. 25
2.9 Protection ....................................................................................................................................... 27
2.9.1 Equipment Level Protection................................................................................................... 27
2.9.2 Network Level Protection....................................................................................................... 27
2.10 ASON Features ............................................................................................................................ 28
2.11 TCM .............................................................................................................................................. 28
2.12 E13/M13 Function ........................................................................................................................ 29
2.13 RPR .............................................................................................................................................. 29
2.14 ETH-OAM..................................................................................................................................... 30
2.15 Software Package Loading .......................................................................................................... 30
2.16 Hot Patch...................................................................................................................................... 31
2.17 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression .................................................................................................... 31
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 5 of 243

Product Description
2.18 PRBS Function............................................................................................................................. 32
2.19 Board Version Replacement ........................................................................................................ 32
2.20 DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces ........................................... 33
2.21 NSF Function ............................................................................................................................... 34
2.22 OAM Information Interworking ..................................................................................................... 34
2.23 Clock ............................................................................................................................................ 35
3 Hardware .......................................................................................................................37
3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 37
3.2 Cabinet ........................................................................................................................................... 37
3.3 OptiX OSN 1500A Subrack ............................................................................................................ 39
3.3.1 Structure ................................................................................................................................ 39
3.3.2 Slot Allocation ........................................................................................................................ 40
3.3.3 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................... 47
3.4 OptiX OSN 1500B Subrack............................................................................................................ 48
3.4.1 Structure ................................................................................................................................ 48
3.4.2 Slot Allocation ........................................................................................................................ 49
3.4.3 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................... 59
3.5 Boards ............................................................................................................................................ 59
3.5.1 Board Type ............................................................................................................................ 59
3.5.2 SDH Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 62
3.5.3 PDH Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 63
3.5.4 DDN Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 65
3.5.5 Data Processing Boards........................................................................................................ 65
3.5.6 WDM Boards ......................................................................................................................... 67
3.5.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards........................................................................................... 68
3.5.8 Auxiliary Boards..................................................................................................................... 69
4 Software.........................................................................................................................71
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 71
4.2 Board Software............................................................................................................................... 72
4.3 NE Software ................................................................................................................................... 72
4.4 T2000 System ................................................................................................................................ 73
4.5 ASON Software .............................................................................................................................. 74
5 Data Features ................................................................................................................77

5.1 Ethernet Features........................................................................................................................... 77
5.1.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................... 77
5.1.2 Application ............................................................................................................................. 84
5.1.3 Protection .............................................................................................................................. 88
5.2 RPR Features................................................................................................................................. 91
5.2.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................... 92
5.2.2 Application ............................................................................................................................. 96
5.2.3 Protection .............................................................................................................................. 98
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 6 of 243

Product Description
5.3 ATM Features ............................................................................................................................... 102
5.3.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................. 102
5.3.2 Application ........................................................................................................................... 104
5.3.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................ 108
5.4 SAN Features............................................................................................................................... 109
5.5 DDN Features .............................................................................................................................. 109
5.5.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................. 109
5.5.2 Application ............................................................................................................................110
5.5.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................. 111
6 DCN Features .............................................................................................................. 113

6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................113
6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN .....................................................................................................114
6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions .............................................................................................................115
6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes .........................................................................................115
6.2 HWECC.........................................................................................................................................116
6.2.1 Features................................................................................................................................116
6.2.2 Application ............................................................................................................................117
6.3 IP Over DCC .................................................................................................................................118
6.3.1 Features................................................................................................................................118
6.3.2 Application ............................................................................................................................119
6.4 OSI Over DCC.............................................................................................................................. 120
6.4.1 Features............................................................................................................................... 120
6.4.2 Application ........................................................................................................................... 120
7 ASON Features............................................................................................................123
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies ........................................................................................ 123
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links .......................................................................................... 123
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links ................................................................................................. 125
7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration................................................................................................ 125
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration.............................................................................. 126
7.4 ASON Clock Tracing .................................................................................................................... 127
7.5 SLA............................................................................................................................................... 130
7.6 Diamond Services ........................................................................................................................ 131
7.7 Gold Services ............................................................................................................................... 135
7.8 Silver Services.............................................................................................................................. 136
7.9 Copper Services........................................................................................................................... 138
7.10 Iron Services .............................................................................................................................. 139
7.11 Tunnels ....................................................................................................................................... 140
7.12 Service Association .................................................................................................................... 142
7.13 Service Optimization .................................................................................................................. 143
7.14 Service Migration........................................................................................................................ 143
7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes ....................................................................................... 144
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 7 of 243

Product Description
7.16 Preset Restoring Trail................................................................................................................. 145
7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail................................................................................................... 145
7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic .................................................................................................... 147
7.19 Shared Risk Link Group ............................................................................................................. 147
7.20 ASON Trail Group....................................................................................................................... 148
7.21 Protocol Encryption .................................................................................................................... 149
7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane ....................................................................................................... 149
8 Protection ....................................................................................................................151
8.1 Equipment Level Protection ......................................................................................................... 151
8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards.................................................................................... 151
8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect, Timing and SCC Units......................................... 152
8.1.3 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards ..................................................................................... 153
8.1.4 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards ........................................................................................... 154
8.1.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit...................................................................... 154
8.1.6 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit .................................................................. 154
8.1.7 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply ............................................................. 155
8.1.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions .................................................... 155
8.2 Network Level Protection ............................................................................................................. 156
8.2.1 Linear MSP .......................................................................................................................... 156
8.2.2 MSP Ring............................................................................................................................. 157
8.2.3 SNCP................................................................................................................................... 158
8.2.4 DNI....................................................................................................................................... 163
8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection ................................................................................... 164
8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP ................................................................................................... 164
8.2.7 RPR Protection.................................................................................................................... 165
8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection ............................................................................................... 167
9 Clock ............................................................................................................................169
9.1 Clock Source ................................................................................................................................ 169
9.1.1 External Clock Source ......................................................................................................... 169
9.1.2 Line Clock Source ............................................................................................................... 169
9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source ........................................................................................................ 169
9.1.4 Internal Clock Source .......................................................................................................... 170
9.2 Clock Working Mode .................................................................................................................... 170
9.2.1 Locked Mode ....................................................................................................................... 170
9.2.2 Holdover Mode .................................................................................................................... 170
9.2.3 Free-Run Mode ................................................................................................................... 170
9.3 Clock Outputs............................................................................................................................... 170
9.4 Clock Protection ........................................................................................................................... 171
9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled ........................................................................ 171
9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled ............................................................... 171
9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled .............................................................. 172
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 8 of 243

Product Description
9.5 Tributary Retiming ........................................................................................................................ 173
9.5.1 Retiming Principle................................................................................................................ 173
9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function ................................................................................... 174
10 OAM ...........................................................................................................................177
10.1 Operation and Maintenance....................................................................................................... 177
10.2 Network Management ................................................................................................................ 178
11 Security Management ...............................................................................................181

11.1 Authentication Management....................................................................................................... 181
11.2 Authorization Management......................................................................................................... 181
11.3 Network Security Management .................................................................................................. 182
11.4 System Security Management ................................................................................................... 183
11.5 Log Management........................................................................................................................ 183
11.5.1 NE Security Log Management........................................................................................... 183
11.5.2 Syslog Management .......................................................................................................... 183
12 Technical Specifications ..........................................................................................185

12.1 Interface Types........................................................................................................................... 185
12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface ........................................................................................ 186
12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface........................................................................................................ 186
12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface.................................................................................................. 190
12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface ........................................................................................................ 191
12.2.4 Laser Safety Class ............................................................................................................ 192
12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces......................................................................................... 192
12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface .................................................................................................... 192
12.3.2 DDN Interface.................................................................................................................... 193
12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface .............................................................................................................. 194
12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance ....................................................................... 195
12.4.1 Clock Interface Type.......................................................................................................... 195
12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance......................................................................... 195
12.5 Transmission Performance ........................................................................................................ 196
12.6 Timeslot Numbering ................................................................................................................... 196
12.7 Power Supply Specification........................................................................................................ 197
12.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards ............................................................................... 197
12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility.................................................................................................... 200
12.10 Safety Certification ................................................................................................................... 202
12.11 Environmental Specification ..................................................................................................... 203
12.12 Environment Requirement ....................................................................................................... 203
12.12.1 Environment for Storage.................................................................................................. 203
12.12.2 Environment for Transportation ....................................................................................... 205
12.12.3 Environment for Operation .............................................................................................. 208
A Compliant Standards ................................................................................................. 211
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 9 of 243

Product Description
A.1 ITU-T Recommendations..............................................................................................................211
A.2 IEEE Standards............................................................................................................................ 213
A.3 IETF Standards ............................................................................................................................ 214
A.4 ANSI Standards............................................................................................................................ 214
A.5 Environment Related Standards .................................................................................................. 214
A.6 EMC Standards............................................................................................................................ 215
A.7 Safety Compliance Standards ..................................................................................................... 216
A.8 Protection Standards.................................................................................................................... 216
A.9 ASON Standards.......................................................................................................................... 217
B Basic Principle ...........................................................................................................219

B.1 Introduction to SDH ..................................................................................................................... 219
B.1.1 SDH Levels ......................................................................................................................... 219
B.1.2 Multiplexing Structure.......................................................................................................... 219
B.1.3 Basic Frame Structure......................................................................................................... 220
B.1.4 SOH Description ................................................................................................................. 220
B.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description............................................................................ 223
B.2 Introduction to ATM ...................................................................................................................... 224
B.2.1 Introduction to ATM ............................................................................................................. 224
B.2.2 ATM Cell Structure .............................................................................................................. 225
B.3 Introduction to Ethernet ............................................................................................................... 225
B.3.1 Basic Technologies ............................................................................................................. 225
B.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure.................................................................................................... 226
B.4 Link Aggregation .......................................................................................................................... 227
B.4.1 Concepts ............................................................................................................................. 227
B.4.2 Characteristics .................................................................................................................... 227
B.5 Introduction to MPLS ................................................................................................................... 228
B.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 228
B.5.2 Encapsulation Format ......................................................................................................... 229
B.6 QinQ Principle.............................................................................................................................. 229
B.6.1 Introduction to QinQ ............................................................................................................ 229
B.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure ................................................................................................ 230
C Glossary......................................................................................................................233
D Acronyms and Abbreviations....................................................................................239
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 10 of 243

Product Description
Network Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 is new generation equipment developed by Huawei

Technologies Co., Ltd (hereinafter referred to as Huawei).
The OptiX OSN 1500 integrates the following technologies to transmit voice and data
services on the same platform with high efficiency:
Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)
Ethernet
Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
Storage area network (SAN)
DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting)
Digital data network (DDN)
Automatically switched optical network (ASON)
There are two types of OptiX OSN 1500 system. Figure 1-1 shows the OptiX OSN
1500A and Figure 1-2 shows the OptiX OSN 1500B. The differences between the
OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B lie in the appearance and access
capacity.
The different features of the OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B are described in this
document. If the features are not described, they still remain the same.
Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 1500A
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 11 of 243

Product Description
Figure 1-2 OptiX OSN 1500B
The OptiX OSN 1500 is used at the access layer of a MAN. The OptiX OSN 1500 can
also be networked with the following equipment to optimize the investment and to
lower the networking costs for customers:
OptiX OSN 9500
OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500T
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Figure 1-3 describes how the OptiX OSN 1500 NE is used in a transmission network.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 12 of 243

Product Description
Figure 1-3 Network application of the OptiX OSN 1500

OptiX OSN 3500T
OptiX OSN 9500

OptiX OSN 7500
OptiX OSN 3500
Backbone
layer
OptiX OSN 3500T
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 3500

Convergence
layer
OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 2500

Access
layer
GSM/CDMA
PSTN
Ethernet
...
ATM
SAN
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)
Storage Area Network (SAN)
Ethernet
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 13 of 243

Product Description
Function
2.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity

The CXL boards of different versions have different cross-connect capacity.
Table 2-1 lists the cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500
Cross-Connect and
Timing Board
Higher Order
Cross-Connect
Capacity
Lower Order
Cross-Connect
Capacity
Access Capacity
of Single
Subrack
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1,
Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4,
Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16
20 Gbit/s (128
x 128 VC-4)
20 Gbit/s (128 x 128

VC-4, equivalent to
384 x 384 VC-3 or
8064 x 8064 VC-12)
15 Gbit/s (96 x 96
VC-4)
R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1,
R1CXLQ1, R1CXLL4,
R1CXLD4, R1CXLQ4,
R1CXLL16
15 Gbit/s (96 x
96 VC-4)
5 Gbit/s (32 x 32
VC-4, equivalent to
96 x 96 VC-3 or
2016 x 2016 VC-12)
10 Gbit/s (64 x 64
VC-4)
2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity

The OptiX OSN 1500A and the OptiX OSN 1500B have different slot access
capacities. Moreover, the access capacities depend on the cross-connect and timing
units.
If the cross-connect and timing units use the Q2/Q3CXL series boards, Figure 2-1
shows the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 15 of 243

Product Description
Figure 2-1 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack (Q2/Q3CXL)
Slot
XCS1A PIU
Slot 11 PIU
XCS B1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 6
Slot 2/12
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 7 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 3/13
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 8 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 4
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 9 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 5
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 10
Slot20
FAN
AUX
If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, Figure 2-2 shows
the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Figure 2-2 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack (R1CXL)
Slot 1
Slot 20
FAN
PIU
Slot 11
PIU
Slot 6 622Mbit/s
Slot 2 622Mbit/s
Slot 12 1.25Gbit/s Slot 7 622Mbit/s
Slot 3
Slot 13 1.25Gbit/s Slot 8 622Mbit/s
Slot 4
2.5Gbit/s
Slot 9 AMU/EOW
Slot 5
2.5Gbit/s
Slot 10
AUX
In the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, slot 12 and slot 13 can be divided into half-width
slots. Slot 12 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 12 and slot 2, and
slot 13 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 3 and slot 13.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500A are
the Q2/Q3CXL series boards:
As full-width slots, slot 12 and slot 13 each have the access capacity of 2.5
Gbit/s.
As half-width slots, slots 2, 3, 12 and 13 each have the access capacity of 1.25
Gbit/s.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500A are
the R1CXL series boards:
As a full-width slot, slot 12 has the access capacity of 1.875 Gbit/s, and slot 13
has the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
As half-width slots, slot 2, slot 12 and slot 13 can house boards. Slot 2 has the
access capacity of 622 Mbit/s, slot 12 and slot 13 each have the access capacity
of 1.25 Gbit/s.
If the cross-connect and timing units use the Q2/Q3CXL series boards, Figure 2-3
shows the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 16 of 243

Product Description
Figure 2-3 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (Q2/Q3CXL)
Slot 14
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 1/11
2.5Gbit/s
Slot 6
622Mbit/s
Slot 2/12
2.5Gbit/s
Slot 7
622Mbit/s
Slot 3/13
2.5Gbit/s
Slot 8
622Mbit/s
Slot 4
2.5Gbit/s
Slot 9
622Mbit/s
Slot 5
2.5Gbit/s
Slot 10
AUX
If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, Figure 2-4 shows
the access capacity of each slot in the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Figure 2-4 Access capacity of the slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (R1CXL)
Slot 14
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 1
Slot 11 622Mbit/s
Slot 6
622Mbit/s
Slot 2
Slot 12 1.25Gbit/s
Slot 7
622Mbit/s
Slot 3
Slot 13 1.25Gbit/s
Slot 8
622Mbit/s
Slot 4
2.5Gbit/s
Slot 9
AMU/EOW
Slot 5
2.5Gbit/s
Slot 10
AUX
In the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack, slot 11, slot 12 and slot 13 can be divided into
half-width slots. Slot 11 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 1 and
slot 11; slot 12 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 2 and slot 12;
and slot 13 can be divided into two half-width slots numbered slot 3 and slot 13.
In case the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500B are
the Q2/Q3CXL series boards:
As full-width slots, slots 1113 each have the access capacity of 2.5 Gbit/s.
As six half-width slots, slots 13 and slots 1113 each have the access capacity
of 1.25 Gbit/s.
If the cross-connect and timing boards configured on the OptiX OSN 1500B are the
R1CXL series boards:
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
As a full-width slot, slot 11 has the access capacity of 622 Mbit/s, slot 12 and slot
13 each have the access capacity of 1.25 Gbit/s.
Page 17 of 243

Product Description
As half-width slots, slots 11-13 can house boards, and the access capacity of
each slot is the same as the access capacity of a full-width slot.
2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services.
2.2.1 SDH Services

The OptiX OSN 1500 can process SDH services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following SDH services:
Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16
Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c
Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC4-Xv (X8), VC3-Xv (X24)
SDH services with FEC: 2.666 Gbit/s
2.2.2 PDH Services

The OptiX OSN 1500 can process PDH services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following PDH services:
E1/T1 service
E3/T3 service
E4 service
2.2.3 Ethernet Services

The OptiX OSN 1500 can process Ethernet services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides FE and GE interfaces to process the following Ethernet
services:
Ethernet private line (EPL) service
Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service
Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service
2.2.4 RPR Services

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides FE and GE interfaces that support the resilient packet
ring (RPR).
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following RPR services:
EVPL service
EVPLAN service
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 18 of 243

Product Description
2.2.5 ATM Services

The OptiX OSN 1500 can process ATM services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following ATM services:
Constant bit rate (CBR) service
Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service
Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service
Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
2.2.6 DDN Services

The OptiX OSN 1500 can process DDN services.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can process the following DDN services:
N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service
Framed E1 service
2.2.7 SAN Services

The OptiX OSN 1500 can process SAN services.
By using four independent multiservice access ports, the OptiX OSN 1500 can
process the following SAN services:
Fiber channel (FC) service
Fiber connection (FICON) service
Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service
Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) service
2.2.8 Service Access Capacity

Configured with different quantity of different boards, the OptiX OSN 1500 can access
services of different capacities.
The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 1500 can access varies according to the
type and quantity of the configured boards. Table 2-2 lists the maximum capacity of
the OptiX OSN 1500 for accessing different services.
Table 2-2 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500
Service Class
Maximum Access Capacity

OptiX OSN 1500A
OptiX OSN 1500B
STM-16 standard or
concatenated services
STM-16 (FEC) services
STM-4 standard or concatenated

services
18
18
STM-1 standard services
42
54
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 19 of 243

Product Description
Service Class
Maximum Access Capacity

OptiX OSN 1500A
OptiX OSN 1500B
STM-1 (electrical) services
18
E4 services
E3/T3 services
27
E1/T1 services
64
190
FE services
32
56
GE services
12
STM-1 ATM services
12
STM-4 ATM services
ESCON services
12
FICON/FC100 services
FC200 services
DVB-ASI services
12
N x 64 kit/s services
16
Framed E1 services
16
2.3 Interface
The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces

Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.
Table 2-3 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 20 of 243

Product Description
Table 2-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500

Interface
Description
SDH service
interface
STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors

STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je,
U-16.2Je (CXL16 does not provide L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je interfaces)
STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f
STM-16 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 can output fixed
wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz.
PDH service
interface
75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors

100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors
75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
Ethernet service
interface
10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
DDN service
interface
RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1
ATM service
interface
STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2

STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the N1PD3/N1PL3/PL3A
board
IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the
N1PQ1/N1PQM/N2PQ1/R1PD1 board
Storage area
network (SAN)
service interface
FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical interfaces
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, Ve-4.2 are technical
specifications defined by Huawei.
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces

The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
Table 2-4 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the
OptiX OSN 1500.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 21 of 243

Product Description
Table 2-4 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Interface Type
Description
Administration
One remote maintenance interface (OAM)

Four broadcast data interfaces (S1S4)
One Ethernet interface for network management (ETH)
One commissioning interface (COM)
Orderwire
interface
One orderwire phone interface (PHONE)
Clock interface
Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Alarm interface
Three alarm input and one alarm output interface

Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces
Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces
2.4 Networking
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be used for several network topologies such as the ring
network and the chain network.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following
types of NEs:
Terminal multiplexer (TM)
Add/drop multiplexer (ADM)
Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro
equipment series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.
When the equipment is interconnecting, make sure that the K bytes to be received and
transmitted are on the same path at both ends.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide
a complete ASON solution. This solution covers all the layers including the
backbone layer, the convergence layer, and the access layer.
Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX 1500 can be

interconnected with the WDM equipment.
Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 1500
can be interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.
Table 2-5 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 22 of 243

Product Description
Table 2-5 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 1500

Networking Mode
Topology
Chain
Ring
Tangent
rings
Intersecting
rings
Ring with
chain
DNI
Hub
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 23 of 243

Product Description
Networking Mode
8
Topology
Mesh
Legends:
MADM
ADM
TM
ASON NE
2.5 Built-in WDM Technology

The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission
of several wavelengths in one fiber.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a built-in WDM technology. The functions of the
equipment are as follows:
Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1
can be added or dropped.
The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is
supported, and thus multiple waves can be added or dropped.
The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692

compliant standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the
signals are transparently transmitted.
Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are
cascaded with other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is
realized.
The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for

client-side uplink and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). In the
case of these client-side signals, clock recovery is available, and the signal rate
can be monitored.
Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One
board of this type can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the
protection switching time less than 50 ms.
Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1
inter-board standby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time less
than 50 ms.
Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or

demultiplexed.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 24 of 243

Product Description
Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals
over a long distance.
Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.
2.6 External Clock Output Shutdown Function

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the external clock output shutdown function.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the function of external clock output shutdown. The
users can use the T2000 to issue a command to the cross-connect board to shut
down or recover the two external T4 external clock outputs. In addition, the current
configuration status of the NE software can also be queried.
When the function is performed, no external clock signals are output. When the T2000
issues a command to disable the function, the software can recover the clock output.
By default, the external clock output shutdown function is not enabled. That is,
external clock signals are output by default.
2.7 110 V/220 V Power Supply

The equipment supports the input of 110 V or 220 V AC power supply. When DC
power supply is not available, the equipment can still be supplied with AC power.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the 110 V/220 V power supply through an
uninterrupted power module (UPM). The UPM is used to convert 110 V/220 V AC into
48 V DC, and to provide power supply for the OptiX OSN 1500.
A UPM consists of two power boxes and one storage battery, and thus realizes the
protected power supply. The output power of each UPM is 2 x 270 W.
The dimensions of the power box are 438 mm (W) x 240 mm (D) x 44 mm (H).
The storage battery of the OptiX OSN 1500 has four 12 V-40 Ah battery cells, each of
which measures 197 mm (W) x 165 mm (D) x 170 mm (H). If the 110 V/220 V AC
power fails, the storage battery can provide power supply for four hours.
2.8 REG Function

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the board REG function.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hybrid application of REG and ADM, as shown in
Figure 2-5.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 25 of 243

Product Description
Figure 2-5 Hybrid application of ADM and REG

SL16
IN
SL16
REG
OUT
SL16
IN
SL16
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OptiX OSN 1500

IN
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
SL16
SL16
SL16
SL16
ADM
For details on the boards that support REG, see Table 2-6.
Table 2-6 Boards that support the REG
Board
Valid Slot
Function
OptiX OSN 1500A
OptiX OSN 1500B
N2SL16,
N3SL16
slot 12-13
slot 11-13
N2SL16A,
N3SL16A
slot 12-13
slot 11-13
With the REG mode

enabled, the board is in
the RS loopback mode
and only processes the
RSOH and the frame
headers.
NOTE
If the cross-connect and timing units use the R1CXL series boards, the OptiX OSN 1500 does
not support the preceding boards.
For the optical interface types of these boards, see Table 2-7.
Table 2-7 REG optical interfaces
Board
Optical Interface Type
N2SL16, N3SL16
L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
N2SL16A, N3SL16A
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 26 of 243

Product Description
2.9 Protection
The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.
2.9.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment level protection schemes include TPS protection and 1+1 protection.
Table 2-8 lists the equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN
1500.
Table 2-8 Equipment level protection
Protected Object
Protection Scheme
Revertive Mode
OptiX OSN 1500A
OptiX OSN 1500B
E1/T1 processing board
1:1 TPS
1:N (N2) TPS
Revertive
6 x E3/T3 processing board
Not supported
1:1 TPS
Revertive
4 x E4/STM-1 processing
board
Not supported
1:1 TPS
Revertive
Ethernet processing boards

N2EFS0 and N4EFS0
Not supported
1:1 TPS
Revertive
N x 64 kbit/s and framed E1

processing board
Not supported
1:N (N2) TPS
Revertive
Ethernet processing boards

N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and
N3EGS4
1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS
1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS
Non-revertive
DLAG
DLAG
Revertive
(Default)
Non-revertive
ATM IMA processing board
1+1 hot backup
1+1 hot backup
Non-revertive
Cross-connect and timing

unit
1+1 hot backup
1+1 hot backup
Non-revertive
SCC unit
1+1 hot backup
1+1 hot backup
Non-revertive
48 V power interface unit
1+1 hot backup
1+1 hot backup
Non-revertive
+3.3 V board power supply
1:N backup
1:N backup
Non-revertive
2.9.2 Network Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several network level protection schemes.
Table 2-9 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN
1500.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 27 of 243

Product Description
Table 2-9 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500
Network Level Protection
Protection Scheme
SDH protection
Linear MSP
MSP ring
Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP),
subnetwork connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and
subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP)
Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection
Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
Optical-path-shared MSP
Ethernet protection
Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection
ATM protection
VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
2.10 ASON Features

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize
the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.
The ASON features of the OptiX OSN 1500 are as follows:
Supports automatic end-to-end service configuration.
Supports service level agreement (SLA).
Supports mesh networking and protection.
Provides traffic engineering control to ensure load-balance traffic network wide

and improve the bandwidth availability.
Provides distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and

pre-configuration.
Supports span protection and end-to-end service protection, improving the

scalability of the network.
Provides ASON clock tracing.

The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 1500
according to the requirement. If not equipped with the intelligent software system, the OptiX
OSN 1500 does not support the intelligent features described in this manual.
2.11 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.
If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor
the bit errors of each section.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 28 of 243

Product Description
The R1CXL, N2SL16, N3SL16, N2SL16A, N3SL16A, N2SL4, N2SLD4, N2SLQ4,

N2SL1, N2SLQ1 and N2SLO1 boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level.
2.12 E13/M13 Function

The E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals into one
E3/T3 signal or to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16 x E1/21 x T1 signals. The OptiX
OSN 1500 supports the E13/M13 function.
The E13/M13 function has two modes: Transmux and Transmux Server.
These two modes are described as follows:
The remote NE transmits the E1/E3 or T1/T3 services in VC-12/VC-3

granularities to the central NE over the SDH line.
The central NE disassembles the received services into E1/T1 granularities.
For E1/T1 services, the central NE directly demaps VC-12 signals into E1/T1
signals.
For E3/T3 services, the central NE first demaps VC-3 signals into E3/T3
signals. Then, the E13/M13 function is performed to demultiplex E3/T3 signals
into E1/T1 signals.
The central NE first grooms E1/T1 signals, and then by using the E13/M13
function, aggregates and reassembles these E1/T1 signals to E3/T3 signals.
Then, the E3/T3 signals are output.
If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to the local application equipment
through electrical interfaces, the mode is referred to as the Transmux mode.
If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to anoother transmission

equipment over the SDH line, the mode is referred to as the Transmux Server
mode.
2.13 RPR
The RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a
fiber cut or a link failure.
The main features of the RPR are as follows:
Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real
time.
Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels.
Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the
destination node.
Solve the fairness and congestion control problems.
Provide RPR protection.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 29 of 243

Product Description
2.14 ETH-OAM
The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2
maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission
deployed services, locate network faults, and so on.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, Ethernet service processing boards provide the ETH-OAM
function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The ETH-OAM
function provides a complete ETH-OAM solution to automatically detect and locate
faults.
The IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM is realized through the following methods:
The loopback (LB) test, which is used for a bidirectional continuity check.
The link trace (LT) test, which is used to locate the faulty point.
The continuity check (CC), which is used for a unidirectional continuity check.
OAM_Ping test, which is used to test the packet loss ratio and latency in service.
The IEEE 802.3ah ETH-OAM function is realized through the following methods:
Automatic OAM Discovery, which is used to obtain the capability for the opposite
end to support the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol.
Link performance monitoring, which is used to monitor the bit error performance
of the link.
Fault detection, which is used to report a fault to the opposite end.
Remote loopback, which is used to locate a fault and test the link performance.
Self-loop check, which is used to check the self-loop port.
Loop shutdown, which is used to block a self-loop port and rectify a port loop.
2.15 Software Package Loading

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the software package loading function.
The software package loading function supports mass loading of software at NE-level
and diffused loading of software at network-level. This function realizes upgrade and
management of NE software, simplifies the upgrade operations, and improves the
usability of the upgrade operations.
The software package loading has the following features:
Users load the software in a uniform operation interface.
The complete software package is stored on the compact flash (CF) card of the
Q3CXL/R1CXL board. If the board software files are lost, these files can be
restored from the Q3CXL/R1CXL board.
The automatic matching and loading of software package is supported. If the

software version of the in-service board does not match the software package,
the board software will be automatically updated.
The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load

the files required in the current update.
The network-level diffused loading feature realizes the synchronous software

package loading on the NEs in the entire network. These NEs are configured with
the same series of SCC boards.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 30 of 243

Product Description
The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:

Upgrade of software of an NE
Replacement of service boards
Replacement of auxiliary boards
Replacement of the Q3CXL or R1CXL board
Replacement of the CF card of the Q3CXL or R1CXL board
2.16 Hot Patch

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hot patch technology.
Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located
or a new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of
replacing old codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or
realize the new requirement, without any service interruption. These new codes are
referred to as a hot patch.
The hot patch technology has the following features:
The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services.
The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and
prevents frequent software version upgrade.
The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely.
The hot patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the
upgrade cost and to avoid upgrade risks.
The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus
improves the efficiency of solving problems.
2.17 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that
are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board.
When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board,
many alarms are raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line
board. These alarms are all reported to the T2000. Such a large number of alarms can
disturb the troubleshooting and affect the problem solution efficiency. Therefore, the
inter-board alarm suppression function is used to solve this problem.
If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE,
and if higher order alarms are raised on the line board, relevant lower order alarms on
the tributary/data board are suppressed.
If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at
the service source does not generate higher order alarms), the alarms on the
tributary/data board are not suppressed. In this case, these alarms are reported to the
T2000 and are not mistakenly suppressed.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 31 of 243

Product Description
2.18 PRBS Function

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test
function.
The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. An NE that
provides the PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service
path is faulty. Such analysis can be performed for the NE and the entire network.
During deployment or troubleshooting, the PRBS function realizes the test without a
real test device.
The PRBS function has the following two types:
If the PRBS function is used for lower order services, the PRBS module is
integrated on a tributary board.
If the PRBS function is used for higher order services, the PRBS module is
integrated on a line board or a cross-connect board.
The PRBS function is implemented in the following process:

For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested, the user issues a loopback
command on the T2000.
On the T2000, the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this
path.
The tributary, line, or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts
the statistics.
The tributary, line, or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result.
The user queries the PRBS statistics result.
The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board.
2.19 Board Version Replacement

The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new
version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new
version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old
version board.
This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme, and thus reduces the
equipment cost and the maintenance cost.
For OptiX OSN 1500, the board version replacement function is supported by the
N3SL16, N3SL16A, R2PD1, N2PQ1, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N2EFS0, N4EFS0,
N2EGS2 and N2EFS4.
For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to the
OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting.
When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the
replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For
example, if an N2 version line board is used to replace an N1 version line board,
AU-3 services and TCM function cannot be configured on the N2 version line
board.
Page 32 of 243

Product Description
The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP

configured.
2.20 DCC Transparent Transmission Through External

Clock Interfaces
The OptiX OSN 1500 can use external clock interfaces to transparently transmit data
communication channel (DCC) information.
The Q3CXL and R1CXL boards, can provide two 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces to
transmit DCC information. If this function is enabled, you should connect the external
clock interface to the interface board corresponding to a tributary board, by using a
cable. In this case, after DCC overhead signals enter the Q3CXL/R1CXL board, these
signals are further sent, through this tributary board, into the cross-connect unit of the
Q3CXL/R1CXL board. After being bound with service information, the signals are sent
to any optical interface or 2 Mbit/s electrical interface for transmission. At the receive
end, when the optical interface or 2 Mbit/s electrical interface receives the service that
is transmitted in the aforementioned way, the receiving interface is able to extract
DCC information by enabling the same function.
If there is a third-party network between networks composed of Huawei equipment,
the T2000 is able to manage a remote Huawei network by using the DCC transparent
transmission (through external clock interfaces) function.
As shown in Figure 2-6, the T2000 is connected to an NE in Huawei network A, and
hence is able to manage Huawei network A. Huawei networks A, B and C are
connected to a third-party network through NE1, NE2 and NE3 respectively. As the
third-party network is in between, the T2000 cannot obtain network management
information from Huawei networks B and C. If the DCC transparent transmission
(through external clock interfaces) function is enabled on NE1, NE2 and NE3,
however, the T2000 is able to manage Huawei networks B and C.
To enable the DCC transparent transmission (through external clock interfaces) function, the
setting is required on only the NEs that are connected to the third-party network.
On NE2 and NE3 that are respectively located in Huawei networks B and C, the
DCC information in the overhead bus is sent from the external clock interface to
the tributary board. After cross-connect grooming, the DCC information is sent,
together with the service, through an optical interface (or a 2 Mbit/s electrical
interface) for transmission.
On NE1 in Huawei network A, when the optical interface (or the 2 Mbit/s electrical
interface) receives service data transparently transmitted through the third-party
network, the DCC information is extracted, and is then sent through the tributary
board to the external clock interface. At last, the DCC information returns to the
overhead bus.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 33 of 243

Product Description
Figure 2-6 Application of DCC transparent transmission through external clock interfaces
iManager T2000
External clock interface

Optical interface or 2 Mbit/s
electrical interface
Third-party
network

1
DCC
DCC
Huawei
network A
Huawei
network B

Huawei
network C
2.21 NSF Function

The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the N4EFS0
and N2EFS4 boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an
upgrade of the board software and network processor (NP) software.
In the NSF mode, the upgrade of the board software and NP software for the N4EFS0
and N2EFS4 boards can be completed after performing a warm reset of the boards. In
this case, the service interruption time is less than 50 ms, which meets the
carrier-class requirements.
If the two versions before and after the upgrade have significant differences, the
service interruption during the NSF-mode upgrade cannot be controlled within 50 ms,
and this ensures only a low service interruption time.
2.22 OAM Information Interworking

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports OAM information interworking.
Any of the following methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 1500 to transparently
transmit the OAM information of the third-party equipment, or for the third-party
equipment to transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
HWECC
Page 34 of 243

Product Description
IP over DCC
OSI over DCC
DCC transparent transmission through 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces
2.23 Clock
The OptiX 1500 supports the clock functions.
SSM clock protocol
Tributary retiming
Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input
Line clock source
Tributary clock source
Three working modes are as follows:
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Tracing mode
Holdover mode
Free-run mode
ASON clock tracing
Page 35 of 243

Product Description
Hardware
3.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be installed in an ETSI cabinet (300 mm or 600 mm deep)
or a 19-inch standard cabinet. It can also be installed against the wall.
3.2 Cabinet
The OptiX OSN 1500 can be installed in an ETSI cabinet (300 mm or 600 mm deep)
or a 19-inch standard cabinet.
Figure 3-1 shows an ETSI cabinet that is 300 mm deep.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 37 of 243

Product Description
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet
H
W
Table 3-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.

Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H)
55
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H)
79
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H)
60
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H)
84
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H)
70
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 38 of 243

Product Description
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H)
94
NOTE
All dimensions are in mm. The following figure shows the dimensions of the width, the depth
and the height.
H
W
Table 3-2 lists the technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets.
Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H)
90
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H)
110
3.3 OptiX OSN 1500A Subrack

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 1500A consists of slots and boards that can be
configured.
3.3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack is of a one-layer structure. The subrack consists of the
slot area for boards, power supply area, fan area and fiber routing area.
Figure 3-2 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 39 of 243

Product Description
Figure 3-2 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
2
3
H
4
6
5
1. Fan area
4. Processing board area

5. Fiber routing area
3. Power supply area

6. Ear bracket
The functions of each subrack area are as follows:

Slot area for boards: This area is used to house the boards for the OptiX OSN
1500A.
Fan area: This area is used to house one fan module, which dissipates the heat
generated by the equipment.
Power supply area: This area is used to house two PIU boards, which are used to
supply power for the equipment.
Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers and cables in the subrack.
3.3.2 Slot Allocation

The OptiX OSN 1500A subrack has only one layer, where 12 slots are available
before the division of slots.
Figure 3-3 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
Figure 3-3 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
Slot 1
Slot 20
FAN
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL
Slot 10
AUX
Page 40 of 243

Product Description
Slots 12 and 13 in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack can be divided into two half-width
slots. See Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack after the division of slots
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 2
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 3
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 1
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 4
CXL
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL
Slot 10
AUX
The slots in the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack are allocated as follows:
Slots for integrated boards of the line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units: slots
45
Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 69 and 1213
Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 69, 1213, and 23
Slot for the orderwire board: slot 9 (also for the processing board)
Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 10
Slots for PIU boards: slots 1 and 11
Slots for the fan board: slot 20
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing
Boards
Table 3-3 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for
the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-3 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the
processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Slots for Processing Boards
Slots for Interface Boards
Slot 12
Slots 6 and 7
Boards and Their Valid Slots

Table 3-4 lists the CXL series boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-4 CXL series boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16
1 x STM-16 integrated board of the SCC,

cross-connect, timing and line units
Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLL16

Slots 4 and 5
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 41 of 243

Product Description
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLL4

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLD4

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLQ4

Slots 4 and 5
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLL1

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLD1

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLQ1

Slots 4 and 5
NOTE
a: The CXL is a board that integrates the SCC, cross-connect, timing, and line units for the OptiX OSN 1500A. It is
one physical board and can be housed in slot 4 or slot 5 on the subrack. On the T2000, the Q2/Q3CXL is displayed
as ECXL, GSCC and SL1/SL4/SL16, and the R1CXL is displayed as RCXL, GSCC and SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated
in the logical slots 8081, 8283 and 45.
Table 3-5 lists the SDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN
1500A.
Table 3-5 SDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1SL16, N2SL16,
N3SL16
1 x STM-16 optical interface board
Valid slots when the cross-connect

capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
N1SL16A,
N2SL16A, N3SL16A

capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 12 and 13.
N1SF16

(with FEC)

Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 42 of 243

Product Description
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4,
N1SLQ4A

N1SLD4, N1SLD4A,
N2SLD4
Slots 12 and 13
R1SLD4

(half-width)

capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 23, 69, and
1213
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 1213
N1SL4, N1SL4A,
N2SL4
Slots 12 and 13
R1SL4

(half-width)

capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slot 2-3, 6-9, 12-13
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slot 2, 6-8, 12-13
N1SLT1

N2SLO1
Slots 12 and 13
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A,
N2SLQ1
Slots 12 and 13
R1SLQ1

(half-width)

N1SL1, N1SL1A,
N2SL1
Slots 12 and 13
R1SL1

(half-width)

N1SEP1
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
2 x STM-1 line processing board
Slots 12 and 13
Page 43 of 243

Product Description
Table 3-6 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN
1500A.
Table 3-6 PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1PL3A (not used

with the interface
board)
Slots 12 and 13
N2PL3A (not used

with the interface
board)
Slots 12 and 13
R1PD1(A/B)
32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm
processing board (half-width)
Slots 2 and 12
R2PD1(A/B)
32 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm
processing board (half-width )
Slots 2 and 12
R1PL1(A/B)
16 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm
processing board (half-width)
Valid slots when the

cross-connect capacity is 20
Gbit/s: slot 6-9
Valid slots when the
cross-connect capacity is 15
Gbit/s: slot 6-8
N1DXA
DDN service convergence

and processing board
Slots 12 and 13
Table 3-7 lists the interface boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-7 Interface Boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
R1L75S
16 x EI 75-ohm interface
board (half-width)
Slots 6 and 7
R1L12S
16 x E1 120-ohm interface
board (half-width)
Slots 6 and 7
Table 3-8 lists the data processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN
1500A.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 44 of 243

Product Description
Table 3-8 Data processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1EMS4
4 x GE Ethernet processing
board with Lanswitch
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 20

Gbit/s: slot 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N2EGS2

N1EGS4

N3EGS4

N1EGT2
2 x GE Ethernet transparent
transmission board

N1EFS4
4 x FE Ethernet processing
Slots 12 and 13
N2EFS4
4 x FE Ethernet processing
Slots 12 and 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
R1EFT4
4 x FE Ethernet transparent
transmission board
(half-width)

Gbit/s: slot 23, 69 and 1213 (622 Mbit/s)
N1EFT8 (not
used with the
interface
board)
8 x FE Ethernet transparent
transmission board
Slots 1213 (622 Mbit/s)
N1EFT8A
8 x FE transparent
transmission board
(interfaces are available on
the front panel)
Slots 12 and 13 (622 Mbit/s)
N2EGR2
2 x GE Ethernet ring
processing board


Gbit/s: slot 2, 68 and 1213 (622 Mbit/s)

Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 45 of 243

Product Description
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N2EMR0 (not
used with the
interface
board)
1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet
processing board

N1ADL4
1 x STM-4 ATM processing

board
N1ADQ1
4 x STM-1 ATM processing

board
N1IDL4
1 x STM-4 IMA processing

board
N1IDQ1
4 x STM-1 IMA processing

board
N1MST4
4-channel multiservice (SAN

or video service) transparent
transmission board



Table 3-9 lists the WDM boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-9 WDM boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1LWX
Arbitrary rate access board
Slots 12 and 13
TN11OBU1
Optical booster amplifier board
Slots 12 and 13
N1FIB
Filter isolating board
Slots 12 and 13
N1MR2A
Arbitrary two-wavelength add/drop board (processing

board)
Slots 12 and 13
N1MR2B
Arbitrary two-wavelength add/drop board (half-width)
slot 2-3, 69 and 1213 (622

Mbit/s)
TN11MR2
2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
Slots 12 and 13
TN11MR4
4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
Slots 12 and 13
TN11CMR2
2-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board
Slots 12 and 13
TN11CMR4
4-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board
Slots 12 and 13
Table 3-10 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots of the OptiX
OSN 1500A.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 46 of 243

Product Description
Table 3-10 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1BA2
2-channel optical booster amplifier board
Slots 12 and 13
N1BPA, N2BPA
1-channel amplifier and 1-channel

preamplifier board
Slots 12 and 13
61COA, 62COA,
N1COA
COA board
Slots 101 and 102
ROP
Single wavelength long-haul board

(remote pumping)
Slot 103 (external)
Table 3-11 lists the auxiliary boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-11 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
R1AMU
Orderwire processing or alarm

concatenation board
Slot 9
R1AUX
System auxiliary processing unit
Slot 10
R2AUX
Slot 10
R1PIUA
PIU board
Slots 1 and 11
R1FAN
Fan board
Slot 20
R1EOW
Orderwire communication board
Slot 9
UPMa
Uninterruptable power module
Slot 50
a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in the logical slot
50.
3.3.3 Technical Specifications

The technical specifications of the subrack provide the dimensions and weight.
Table 3-12 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
Table 3-12 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
444 (W) x 262 (D) x 131 (H)
8 (with the backplane, fan and two PIU boards)
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 47 of 243

Product Description
3.4 OptiX OSN 1500B Subrack

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 1500B consists of slots and boards that can be
configured.
3.4.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack is of a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the
slot area for processing boards, slot area for interface boards, slot area for the
auxiliary interface board, power supply area and fan area.
Figure 3-5 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
Figure 3-5 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
2
3
H
5
W
6
1. Interface board area
2. Power supply area

6. Fiber routing area
3. Fan area
7. Ear bracket
The functions of each subrack area are as follows:

Slot area for interface boards: This area is used to house the tributary interface
boards and Ethernet interface boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Slot area for processing boards: This area is used to house the line, tributary and
Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Fan area: This area is used to house one fan module, which dissipates the heat
generated by the equipment.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 48 of 243

Product Description
Slot area for the auxiliary interface board: This area is used to house the auxiliary
interface board, which provides alarm interfaces, orderwire phone interface,
management and maintenance interface, and clock interface.
Power supply area: This area is used to house two PIU boards, which are used to
supply power for the equipment.
Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers and cables in the subrack.
3.4.2 Slot Allocation

The OptiX OSN 1500B subrack has two layers. The upper layer of the subrack, where
four slots are present, is the slot area for the interface boards and PIU boards. The
lower layer of the subrack, where ten slots are available before the division of slots
(including slots 4 and 5), is the slot area for the processing boards and auxiliary
boards.
Figure 3-6 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
Figure 3-6 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL
Slot 10
AUX
Slots 11-13 in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack can be divided. As shown in Figure 3-7,
the divided slots are in the dashed area. The slots in the left portion of the original
slots are slots 1-3, and the slots in the right portion of the original slots are slots 11-13.
Figure 3-7 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack (after the division of slots)
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 2
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 3
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL
Slot 10
AUX
The slots in the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack are allocated as follows:
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Slots for integrated boards of the line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units: slots
4-5
Page 49 of 243

Product Description
Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 6-9 and 11-13
Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 1-9 and 11-13
Slots for the interface boards: slots 14-17
Slot for the orderwire board: slot 9 (also for the processing board)
Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 10
Slots for PIU boards: slots 18 and 19
Slot for the fan board: slot 20
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing
Boards
Table 3-13 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots
for the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-13 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the
processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Slots for
Processing
Boards
Slots for Interface

Boards
Slots for
Processing
Boards
Slots for Interface

Boards
Slot 2
Slot 14
Slot 3
Slot 16
Slot 7
Slot 15
Slot 8
Slot 17
Slot 12
Slots 14 and 15
Slot 13
Slots 16 and 17
The corresponding interface boards of the PD3, PL3, SEP, and SPQ4 can be housed
only in slots of even numbers.
For the OptiX OSN 1500B, the boards housed in slots 12 and 7 share the same
interface board housed in slot 15, and the boards housed in slots 13 and 8 share the
same interface board housed in slot 17. Therefore, when you configure the boards,
ensure the following:
If slot 12 houses the N1EMS4 (used with an interface board) or R1PD1, slot 7
cannot house any board used with an interface board.
If slot 13 houses the N1EMS4 (used with an interface board) or R1PD1, slot 8
cannot house any board used with an interface board.
Boards and Their Valid Slots

Table 3-14 lists the CXL series boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-14 CXL series boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
Q2CXL16,
Q3CXL16

Slots 4 and 5
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 50 of 243

Product Description
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
R1CXLL16

Slots 4 and 5
Q2CXL4,
Q3CXL4

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLL4

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLD4

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLQ4

Slots 4 and 5
Q2CXL1,
Q3CXL1

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLL1

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLD1

Slots 4 and 5
R1CXLQ1

Slots 4 and 5
NOTE
a: The CXL is a board that integrates the SCC, cross-connect, timing, and line units for the
OptiX OSN 1500B. It is one physical board and can be housed in slot 4 or slot 5 on the subrack.
On the T2000, the Q2/Q3CXL is displayed as ECXL, GSCC and SL1/SL4/SL16, and the R1CXL
is displayed as RCXL, GSCC and SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated in the logical slots 8081, 8283
and 45.
Table 3-15 lists the SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN
1500B.
Table 3-15 SDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1SL16, N2SL16,
N3SL16
1 x STM-16 optical
interface board
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20

Gbit/s: slots 11-13
If the cross-connect capacity is 15 Gbit/s, these
slots are unavailable.
N1SL16A, N2SL16A,
N3SL16A
1 x STM-16 optical
interface board

Gbit/s: slots 11-13
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 51 of 243

Product Description
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1SF16
1 x STM-16 outband
optical interface board
(with FEC)

Gbit/s: slots 11-13
4 x STM-4 optical
interface board

Gbit/s: slots 11-13
N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A,
N2SLQ4


N1SLD4, N2SLD4A,
N2SLD4
2 x STM-4 optical
interface board

Gbit/s: slots 11-13
Gbit/s: slots 12-13
N1SL4, N1SL4A,
N2SL4
1 x STM-4 optical
interface board
Slots 11-13
R1SLD4
2 x STM-4 optical
interface board
(half-width)

Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 11-13 (up to two optical
interfaces can be configured), slots 6-9 (one
optical interfaces can be configured).
Gbit/s: slot 11 (one optical interfaces can be
configured), slots 12-13 (up to two optical
interfaces can be configured).
R1SL4
N1SLT1
1 x STM-4 optical
interface board
(half-width)

Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13
12 x STM-1 optical
interface board

Gbit/s: slots 11-13

Gbit/s: slots 6-8, 11-13

N2SLO1
8 x AU-3 high density

access board

Gbit/s: slots 11-13
Gbit/s: slots 12-13
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A,
N2SLQ1
4 x STM-1 optical
interface board
Slots 11-13
N1SL1, N1SL1A,
N2SL1
1 x STM-1 optical
interface board
Slots 11-13
R1SLQ1
4 x STM-1 optical
interface board
(half-width)

Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)

Page 52 of 243

Product Description
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
R1SL1
1 x STM-1 optical
interface board
(half-width)

Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13
N1SEP (used with

the interface board)a
8 x STM-1 (e) processing

board
Slots 1213
N1SEP1 (not used

with the interface
board)a
2 x STM-1 (e) processing

board
Slots 1113

a: The SEP1 board is displayed as the SEP1 or SEP on the T2000, depending on the interfacing mode of the board.
When the SEP1 provides interfaces on the front panel, it is displayed as the SEP1 on the T2000. When the SEP1 is used
with an interface board, it is displayed as the SEP on the T2000.
Table 3-16 lists the PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN
1500B.
Table 3-16 PDH processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1SPQ4
4 x E4/STM-1 processing board
Slots 12 and 13
N2SPQ4 (used with

the interface board)
4 x E4/STM-1 processing board
Slots 12 and 13
R1PL1(A/B) (interfaces
available on the front
panel)
16 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm interface
and processing board
Slots 69
N2PQ3
Slots 12 and 13
N1PD3
Slots 12 and 13
N2PD3
Slots 12 and 13
N2PL3
Slots 12 and 13
N1PL3A (not used with

Slots 1113
N2PL3A (not used with

Slots 1113
N1PL3
Slots 12 and 13
N1PQ1(A/B)
63 x E1 75-ohm/120-ohm processing
board
Slots 1113
N2PQ1(A/B)
board
Slots 1113
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 53 of 243

Product Description
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
R1PD1(A/B)
board (half-width)
Valid slots if the cross-connect

capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-8,
11-13
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 6-8,
11-13
board (half-width)
R2PD1(A/B)

capacity is 20 Gbit/s: slots 1-3, 6-8,
11-13
capacity is 15 Gbit/s: slots 6-8,
11-13
N1PQM
Slots 1113
N1DX1
DDN service access and

convergence board
Slots 11-13
N1DXA
DDN service convergence and

processing board
Slots 11-13
Table 3-17 lists the interface boards or protection switching boards and their valid slots
for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-17 Interface/protection switching boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN
1500B
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1EU08
8 x STM-1 (e) electrical

interface board
Slots 14 and 16
N1OU08
8 x STM-1 optical interface

board
Slots 14 and 16
N2OU08
8 x STM-1 optical interface

board
Slots 14 and 16
N1EU04
4 x STM-1 (e) electrical

interface board
Slots 14 and 16
N1MU04
4 x E4/STM-1 interface board
Slots 14 and 16
N1C34S
3 x 34M/45M electrical
interface switching board
Slots 14 and 16
N1D34S
6 x 34M/45M electrical
Slots 1417
N1D75S
32 x E1/T1 75-ohm electrical

Slots 14-17
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 54 of 243

Product Description
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1D12S

Slots 14-17
N1D12B

interface board
Slots 14-17
N1DM12
DDN service interface board
Slots 14-17
N1TSB8
8-channel electrical interface

switching board
Slots 14 and 15
N1TSB4
4-channel electrical interface

switching board
Slot 14
N1ETF8
8 x FE Ethernet electrical
interface board
Slots 1417
N1EFF8
8-channel Ethernet optical

interface board
Slots 1417
N1ETS8
8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted

pair interface switching board
Slots 14 and 16
Table 3-18 lists the data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN
1500B.
Table 3-18 Data processing boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1EMS4 (used with

4 x GE and 16 x FE
Ethernet processing
Valid slots if the cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s:

slots 12-13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EMS4 (not used

with the interface
board)
4 x GE Ethernet
processing board with
Lanswitch

N1EGS4
4 x GE Ethernet
Lanswitch

4 x GE Ethernet
Lanswitch

N3EGS4
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)


slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slots 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)


Page 55 of 243

Product Description
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N2EGS2
2 x GE Ethernet
Lanswitch

2 x GE Ethernet
transparent
transmission board

N1EFS4
4 x FE Ethernet
Lanswitch
Slots 1113
N2EFS4
4 x FE Ethernet
Lanswitch

N1EFS0 (used with

8 x FE Ethernet
Lanswitch
N2EFS0 (used with

8 x FE Ethernet
Lanswitch
Slots 1213 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N4EFS0 (used with

8 x FE Ethernet
Lanswitch

N1EFT8 (not used

with the interface
board)
8 x 10M/100M
Ethernet transparent
transmission board
N1EFT8 (used with

16 x 10M/100M
Ethernet transparent
transmission board
N1EFT8A
(interfaces available
on the front panel)
8 x FE transparent
transmission board
N2EGR2
2 x GE Ethernet ring
processing board

N1EGT2

slots 11 (622 Mbit/s), 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)




slot 11 (622 Mbit/s), slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N2EMR0 (used with
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
1 x GE and 12 x FE
Ethernet processing
board

slot 12-13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Page 56 of 243

Product Description
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N2EMR0 (not used

with the interface
board)
1 x GE and 4 x FE
Ethernet processing
board

R1EFT4 (interfaces
available on the
front panel)
4 x FE processing
board

slots 1-3, 6-9, 11-13 (622 Gbit/s)
N1EFF8
8-channel Ethernet
optical interface board
Slots 1417
N1ETS8
8 x 10/100M Ethernet
twisted pair interface
switching board
Slots 14 and 16
N1MST4
4-channel multiservice
transparent
transmission board

4 x STM-1 ATM
processing board

N1ADQ1


slots 6-8, 11-13 (622 Gbit/s)


1 x STM-4 ATM
processing board
N1ADL4

4 x STM-1 IMA
processing board
N1IDQ1

N1IDL4
1 x STM-4 IMA
processing board

Table 3-19 lists the WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-19 WDM boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1LWX
Arbitrary rate access board
Slots 1113
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 57 of 243

Product Description
N1MR2A
Arbitrary two-wavelength
add/drop board
Slots 1113
N1MR2B
add/drop board (half-width)
Slots 13, 69 and 1113
N1MR2C
add/drop board
Slots 1417
TN11MR2
2-channel optical add/drop

multiplexing board
Slots 1113
TN11MR4
4-channel optical add/drop

multiplexing board
Slots 1113
TN11CMR2
2-channel CWDM optical

add/drop multiplexing board
Slots 1113
TN11CMR4
4-channel CWDM optical

add/drop multiplexing board
Slots 1113
Table 3-20 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX
OSN 1500B.
Table 3-20 Optical booster amplifier boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
N1BA2
2-channel optical booster

amplifier board
Slots 1113
N1BPA, N2BPA
Optical booster preamplifier

board
Slots 1113
TN11OBU1
Optical booster amplifier

board
Slots 1113
N1FIB
Filter isolating board
Slots 12 and 13
61COA, 62COA,
N1COA
COA board
Slots 101102
ROP
Single wavelength long-haul

board (remote pumping)
Slot 103 (external)
Table 3-21 lists the auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-21 Auxiliary boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
R1AMU
Orderwire processing or alarm

concatenation board
Slot 9
R1AUX
Slot 10
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 58 of 243

Product Description
R2AUX
System auxiliary interface board
Slot 10
R1FAN
Fan board
Slot 20
R1EOW
Orderwire communication board
Slot 9
R1PIU
PIU board
Slots 1819
Uninterruptable power module
Slot 50
UPM
a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in the logical slot
50.
3.4.3 Technical Specifications

The technical specifications of the subrack provide the dimensions and weight.
Table 3-22 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
Table 3-22 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
444 (W) x 263 (D) x 221 (H)
9 (with the backplane, fan and two PIU boards)
3.5 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards.
3.5.1 Board Type

The boards are SDH boards, PDH boards and other boards.
The OptiX OSN 1500 system takes a cross-connect matrix as the kernel and consists
of the following units:
SDH interface unit
PDH interface unit
Ethernet interface unit
DDN interface unit
ATM interface unit
SDH cross-connect matrix unit
Synchronous timing unit
SCC unit
Overhead processing unit
Auxiliary interface unit
Figure 3-8 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500. Table 3-23 lists the
constituent boards and functions of each unit.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 59 of 243

Product Description
SDH/PDH/Ethernet/
ATM/DDN interface
board
PDH signal
Ethernet signal
ATM signal
SCC unit
Cross Connect
Matrix
Interface unit
Auxiliary
Overhead
processing
unit
STM-N optical
signal
Synchronous
timing unit
SDH interface
unit
Figure 3-8 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500
Table 3-23 Boards for the OptiX OSN 1500

Unit
SDH interface
unit
PDH interface
unit
OptiX OSN 1500A
OptiX OSN 1500B
Processing board
N1SF16, N1SL16, N2SL16,

N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A,
N3SL16A, N1SLQ4,
N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4,
N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SL4,
N1SL4A, N2SL4, N2SLO1,
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1,
N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1,
N1SEP1, N1SLT1, R1SL4,
R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1
N1SF16, N1SL16, N2SL16,

N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A,
N3SL16A, N1SLQ4,
N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4,
N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SL4,
N1SL4A, N2SL4, N2SLO1,
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1,
N1SL1, N1SL1A, N2SL1,
N1SEP1, N1SEP, N1SLT1,
R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1,
R1SL1
Interface board
N1EU04, N1EU08, N1OU08,

N2OU08
Protection
switching board
N1TSB8, N1TSB4
Processing board
R1PD1A, R1PD1B, R2PD1A,

R2PD1B, N1PL3A, R1PL1A,
R1PL1B, N2PL3A
R1PD1, R2PD1, N1SPQ4,

N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3,
N1PL3A, N1PQ1, N1PQM,
N2PQ1, R1PL1A, R1PL1B,
N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3,
N2PL3A
Interface board
R1L12S, R1L75S
N1MU04, N1D34S, N1C34S,

N1D75S, N1D12S, N1D12B
Protection
switching board
N1TSB8, N1TSB4
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 60 of 243

Product Description
Unit
OptiX OSN 1500A
OptiX OSN 1500B
Convergence
processing board
N1DXA
N1DX1, N1DXA
Interface board
N1DM12
Processing board
N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFS4,

N2EFS4, R1EFT4, N1EFT8,
N1EFT8A, N1EMS4,
N1EGS4, N3EGS4
N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFS0,

N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N1EFS4,
R1EFT4, N1EFT8, N1EFT8A,
N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4
Interface board
N1ETF8, N1EFF8
Protection
switching board
N1ETS8, N1TSB8
Processing board
N2EMR0, N2EGR2
N2EMR0, N2EGR2
Interface board
N1ETF8, N1EFF8
ATM interface unit
N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4,

N1IDQ1
N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4,

N1IDQ1
SAN interface unit
N1MST4
N1MST4
WDM unit
N1MR2A, N1MR2B,
TN11MR2, TN11MR4,
TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4
N1MR2A, N1MR2B, N1MR2C

(seated in slots for interface
boards), TN11OBU1,
TN11MR2, TN11MR4,
TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4
N1LWX
N1LWX
Remote optical pumping unit
N1FIB, ROP
N1FIB, ROP
Unit that integrates the SCC, line,

cross-connect and clock units
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL4,

Q3CXL4, Q2CXL16,
Q3CXL16, R1CXLL1,
R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1,
R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4,
R1CXLQ4, R1CXLL16
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL4,

Q3CXL4, Q2CXL16,
Q3CXL16, R1CXLL1,
R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1,
R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4,
R1CXLQ4, R1CXLL16
Power interface unit
R1PIUA
R1PIU
UPM (Uninterrupted Power

Module)
UPM
Auxiliary interface unit
AUX
AUX
Orderwire unit
EOW, AMU
EOW, AMU
Fan unit
R1FAN
R1FAN
Optical booster amplifier unit
61COA, 62COA, N1COA
61COA, 62COA, N1COA
N1BPA, N2BPA
N1BPA, N2BPA
N1BA2
N1BA2
DDN interface
unit
Ethernet
interface unit
RPR unit
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 61 of 243

Product Description
Unit
OptiX OSN 1500A
OptiX OSN 1500B
TN11OBU1
TN11OBU1
3.5.2 SDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the SDH processing boards.
Table 3-24 lists the SDH processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 3-24 SDH processing boards
Board
Interfacing Mode
Interface Type
Connector
N1SL16, N2SL16,
N3SL16
Interfaces available on the

front panel
L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je,

U-16.2Je
LC
N1SL16A, N2SL16A,
N3SL16A

front panel
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SF16

front panel
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f
LC
N1SLQ4, N1SLQ4A,
N2SLQ4

front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1SLD4, N1SLD4A,
N2SLD4

front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1SL4, N1SL4A,
N2SL4

front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1SLT1

front panel
S-1.1
LC
N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A

front panel
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2,

Ve-1.2
LC
N2SLQ1

front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1SL1, N1SL1A,
N2SL1

front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
R1SLD4

front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
R1SL4

front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
R1SLQ1

front panel
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2,

Ve-1.2
LC
R1SL1

front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1SEP1a
75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical
SMB
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 62 of 243

Product Description
Board
Interfacing Mode
Interface Type
front panel
interface
Interfaces available on the 4 x

STM-1 line processing board
N1EU04
75-ohm STM-1 electrical

interface
SMB

N1OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1
LC

N2OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1
SC

N1EU08
75-ohm STM-1 electrical

interface
SMB
N2SLO1

front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2,

Ve-1.2
LC
Q2CXL16, Q3CXL16,
R1CXLL16b

front panel
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4,
R1CXLL4, R1CXLD4,
R1CXLQ4b

front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1,
R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1,
R1CXLQ1b

front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1SEPa
Connector
a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are boards of the same type. If they are used with the interface board, they are displayed as
"N1SEP" on the T2000. If the interfaces on their front panels are used, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.
b: The CXL is a board that integrates the line, SCC, cross-connect, and timing units for the OptiX OSN 1500. It can be
seated in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, the CXL board is displayed as three board types: ECXL/RCXL, GSCC and
SLN/SLD41/SLQ41, seated in the logical slots 80-81, 82-83 and 4-5.
3.5.3 PDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the PDH processing boards.
Table 3-25 lists the PDH processing boards and the valid slots of the OptiX OSN
1500A. Table 3-26 lists the PDH processing boards and the valid slots of the OptiX
OSN 1500B.
Table 3-25 PDH processing boards (OptiX OSN 1500A)
Board
Interfacing Mode
Interface Type
Connector
N1PL3A
Interfaces available on the front panel
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
N2PL3A
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface
SMB
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 63 of 243

Product Description
R1PD1A

electrical interface switching board
R1L75S
75-ohm E1 electrical interface
DB44
R1PD1B

R1L12S
DB44
R2PD1A

R1L75S
DB44
R2PD1B

R1L12S
DB44
R1PL1
2mmHM
2mmHM
Table 3-26 PDH processing boards (OptiX OSN 1500B)

Board
Interfacing Mode
Interface Type
Connector
N1SPQ4
Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical

interface board N1MU04

interface
SMB
N2SPQ4

interface board N1MU04

interface
SMB
N1PD3

interface switching board N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3 electrical

interface
SMB
N1PL3

interface switching board N1C34S

interface
SMB
N1PL3A

interface
SMB
N2PQ3


interface
SMB
N2PD3


interface
SMB
N2PL3

interface switching board N1C34S

interface
SMB
N2PL3A

interface
SMB
N1PQ1A
Interfaces available on the 32-channel

electrical interface switching board N1D75S
75-ohm E1 interface
DB44
N1PQ1B

120-ohm E1 interface
DB44
N2PQ1A

75-ohm E1 interface
DB44
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 64 of 243

Product Description
Board
Interfacing Mode
Interface Type
Connector
N2PQ1B

DB44
N1PQM

120-ohm E1 interface,
100-ohm T1 interface
DB44
R1PD1A

75-ohm E1 interface
DB44
R1PD1B

DB44
R2PD1A

75-ohm E1 interface
DB44
R2PD1B

DB44
R1PL1
2mmHM
2mmHM
3.5.4 DDN Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports DDN processing boards.
Table 3-27 lists the DDN processing boards.
Table 3-27 DDN processing boards
Board
Full Name
Interfacing Mode
Interface Type
Connector
N1DX1
N x 64 kbit/s service
access and
convergence board
Interfaces available on
the N x 64 kbit/s interface
board N1DM12
RS449, EIA530,
EIA530-A, V.35, V.24,
X.21, Framed E1
DB28, DB44
N1DXA
N x 64 kbit/s service
convergence board
None
None
None
3.5.5 Data Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports data processing boards.
Table 3-28 lists the Ethernet and ATM data processing boards of the OptiX OSN
1500A and their interfaces. Table 3-29 lists the Ethernet and ATM data processing
boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B and their interfaces.
Table 3-28 Data processing boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500A)
Board
Interfacing Mode
Interface Type
Connector
N2EGS2
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N1EFS4
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
N2EFS4
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 65 of 243

Product Description
N1EGT2
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N1EFT8
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
N1EFT8A
10/100Base-TX
RJ-45
R1EFT4
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
N1EMS4
1000Base-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N1EGS4
1000Base-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N3EGS4
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N2EMR0
10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX,
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
RJ-45, LC
N2EGR2
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N1ADL4
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1ADQ1
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1IDL4
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1IDQ1
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, I-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1MST4
X3.296/(DVB-ASI)EN50083-9,
200-M5-SN-I, 200-SM-LC-I
Table 3-29 Data processing boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500B)
Board
Interfacing Mode
Interface Type
Connector
N2EGS2
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N1EFS0
Interfaces available on the N1ETF8 (8 x 10/100

Mbit/s Ethernet twisted pair interface board)
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
Interfaces available on the N1EFF8 (8 x 10/100

Mbit/s Ethernet optical interface board)
100BASE-FX
LC

10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45

100BASE-FX
LC

10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45

100BASE-FX
LC
N1EFS4
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
N2EFS4
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
N1EGT2
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N2EFS0
N4EFS0
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 66 of 243

Product Description
Board
Interfacing Mode
Interface Type
Connector
N1EFT8
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45

10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45

100BASE-FX
LC
N1EFT8A
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
N2EMR0

10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45

100BASE-FX
LC
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N2EGR2
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N1EMS4

10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45

100BASE-FX
LC
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N1EGS4
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N3EGS4
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
LC
N1ADL4
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2,

Ve-4.2
LC
N1ADQ1
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1,

I-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1IDL4
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2,

Ve-4.2
LC
N1IDQ1
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1,

I-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1MST4
X3.296/(DVB-ASI)
EN50083-9,
200-M5-SN-I,
200-SM-LC-I
LC
R1EFT4
10/100BASE-TX
RJ-45
3.5.6 WDM Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports WDM boards.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 67 of 243

Product Description
Table 3-30 lists the WDM boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A and their interfaces. Table
3-31 lists the WDM boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B and their interfaces.
Table 3-30 WDM boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500A)
Board
Interfacing Mode
Connector
N1MR2A
LC
N1MR2B
LC
N1LWX
LC
TN11MR2
LC
TN11MR4
LC
TN11CMR2
LC
TN11CMR4
LC
Table 3-31 WDM boards and their interfaces (OptiX OSN 1500B)
Board
Interfacing Mode
Connector
N1MR2A
LC
N1MR2B
LC
N1MR2C
LC
N1LWX
LC
TN11MR2
LC
TN11MR4
LC
TN11CMR2
LC
TN11CMR4
LC
3.5.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports several optical amplifier boards.
Table 3-32 lists the optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces.
Table 3-32 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces
Board
Interfacing Mode
Connector
N1BA2
LC
N1BPA, N2BPA
LC
TN11OBU1
LC
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 68 of 243

Product Description
61COA
SC
N1COA
SC
62COA
SC, E2000
ROP
LC
N1FIB
LC, E2000
3.5.8 Auxiliary Boards

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports auxiliary boards.
Table 3-33 lists the auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Table 3-34 lists the auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-33 Auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board
Connector
R1PIUA
Power supply interface
R1FAN
None
R1AUX
RJ-45
R2AUX
RJ-45
R1AMU
RJ-45
R1EOW
RJ-11, RJ-45
Table 3-34 Auxiliary boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B

Board
Connector
R1PIU
Power supply interface
R1FAN
None
R1AUX
RJ-45
R2AUX
RJ-45
R1AMU
RJ-45
R1EOW
RJ-11, RJ-45
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 69 of 243

Product Description
Software
4.1 Overview
The software system of the OptiX OSN 1500 is of a modular structure.
The software system includes the following modules:
Board software (residing in each relevant board)
NE software (residing in the SCC board)
T2000 software (residing on a T2000 computer)
ASON software (contained in the NE software)
The software system of the OptiX OSN 1500 is as shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 1500
T2000 software
ASON
software
NE software
Board software
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
The ASON software can interact with the T2000 software directly, but it needs the NE
software to intercommunicate with the board software.
During the software loading, the ASON software is loaded together with the NE software.
Page 71 of 243

Product Description
4.2 Board Software

The board software runs on each board, and manages, monitors and controls the
operation of the board.
The board software receives the commands issued by the NE software and reports
the board status to the NE software in the form of performance events and alarms.
The board software functions include alarm management, performance management,
configuration management, and communication management. The board software
directly controls the functional modules in a board and implements specific NE
functions that are compliant with ITU-T Recommendations. The board software
provides support for the management of boards performed by the NE software.
The board software is mainly classified into the line software, the tributary software,
the cross-connect software, the data board software, the clock software, and the
orderwire software.
4.3 NE Software
The NE software is used to manage, monitor and control the operation of the boards
of an NE. The NE software also functions as the communication unit between the
T2000 system and the boards. Through the NE software, the T2000 system can
control and manage NEs.
In compliance with ITU-T M.3010, the NE software belongs to the element
management layer in the telecommunications management network (TMN), and
provides NE functions, some coordination functions, and operations system functions
at the network element layer. The data communication function implements the
communication between the NE and other components (including equipment, the
T2000 system, and other NEs).
The NE software consists of the following modules:
Real-time multi-task operating system
Network side (NS) module
Equipment administration module (AM)
Communication module
Database management module
Real-Time Multi-task Operating System

The real-time multi-task operating system of the OptiX OSN 1500 NE software is
responsible for the management of public resources and provides support for the
execution of applications. This system provides an application execution environment
that is independent of the processor hardware, to separate applications from the
processor.
Network Side (NS) Module

The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment
management module. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 72 of 243

Product Description
the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security
control for the NE layer.
Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:
Qx interface module
Command line interface module
Security management module
Equipment Administration Module (AM)

The equipment AM is the kernel of the NE software for implementing NE management,
and includes the Manager and the Agent. The Manager sends network management
operation commands and receives event information. The Agent responds to the
network management operation commands sent by the Manager, performs operations
to managed objects, and reports events according to the status change of the
managed objects.
The equipment AM includes the configuration management module, the performance
management module, the alarm management module, and the MSP switching
management module.
Communication Module
The communication module performs the message communication function (MCF) of
the functional blocks of the transmission network equipment. Through the hardware
interface provided by the SCC board, the communication module transmits the
OAM&P information and exchanges management information between the T2000
system and NEs, and between NEs themselves. This module consists of the network
communication module, the serial communication module, and the ECC
communication module.
Database Management Module

The database management module is an integral component of the NE software, and
consists of the data and the management system. The database, organized as a
relational database, includes the network database, alarm database, performance
database, and equipment database. The management system manages and
accesses the data in the database.
4.4 T2000 System

The OptiX OSN 1500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000
transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000).
The T2000 is used as a network management system to implement a uniform
management of the optical transmission network, and to maintain all the optical
network equipment in the network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the
T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented
management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software
through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over
the network equipment.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 73 of 243

Product Description
The T2000 software manages OptiX equipment through the Qx interface, which
adopts a management protocol specially designed for the OptiX equipment.
The T2000 software runs on a workstation or a PC. The T2000 enables the user not
only to operate and maintain the transmission equipment, but also to manage the
transmission network.
Alarm management
The T2000 realizes the following alarm management functions: real-time collection,
prompting, filtering, browsing, acknowledgement, check, clearing, counting, alarm
insertion, alarm correlation analysis, and fault diagnosis.
Performance management
The T2000 realizes the setting of performance monitoring, and enables the user to
browse, analyze, and print performance data. The short-term and long-term
performance forecast and the performance register reset are also supported.
Configuration management
The T2000 enables the user to configure and manage interfaces, clocks, services,
trails, protections, and time.
Security management
The T2000 realizes NM user management, NE user management, NE login

management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout, and local craft terminal (LCT)
access control.
Maintenance management
The T2000 provides the loopback, board reset, automatic laser shutdown (ALS), and
optical power detection, and data collection functions, to help the maintenance
personnel in troubleshooting.
4.5 ASON Software

According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network
(ASON) includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.
The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the
T2000. The transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is
where the ASON software is applied, and uses the LMP (link management protocol),
OSPF-TE (open shortest path first- traffic engineering), and RSVP-TE (reservation
protocol-traffic engineering) protocols.
Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly
includes the link management module, the signaling module, the routing module, and
the cross-connection management module.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 74 of 243

Product Description
Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture

AOSN software
T2000
Signaling module
Cross-connection
management
module
NE
software
Routing module
LMP link management

module
Link Management Module

By using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following
functions:
Create and maintain control channels.
Verify member links and TE links.
Signaling Module
By using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following
functions:
Set up or interrupt service connections according to user requests.
Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.
Routing Module
By using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:
Collect and flood the TE link information.
Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane.
Compute service trails and control the routing.
Cross-Connection Management Module

The cross-connection management module provides the following functions:
Create and delete cross-connections.
Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 75 of 243

Product Description
Data Features
5.1 Ethernet Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet
features of the OptiX OSN 1500.
5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet
service requirements.
Table 5-1 lists the Ethernet functions of the EFS4 and EFS0 boards.
Table 5-2 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGS2 board.
Table 5-3 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGS4 and EGS4A boards.
Table 5-4 lists the Ethernet functions of the EMS4 board.
Table 5-5 lists the Ethernet functions of the EGT2, EFT8, EFT8A and EFT4 boards.
Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0
Function
N1EFS4
N2EFS4
N1EFS0
N2EFS0
N4EFS0
Interface
4 FE
4 FE
8 FE
8 FE
8 FE
Interface type
10Base-T, 100Base-TX
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board
None
N1ETF8,
N1EFF8
Service frame
format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame
Supported, 9600 bytes
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
None
N1ETS8
(used with
TSB8 to
realize 1:1
TPS),
N1ETF8,
N1EFF8
N1ETS8 (used
with TSB8 to
realize 1:1
TPS),
N1ETF8,
N1EFF8
Page 77 of 243

Product Description
Function
N1EFS4
N2EFS4
N1EFS0
N2EFS0
N4EFS0
Uplink
bandwidth
4 VC-4
8 VC-4
4 VC-4
8 VC-4
8 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x12)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
12
24
24
Ethernet private
line (EPL)
Supported
Ethernet virtual
private line
(EVPL)
Supported
Ethernet private
LAN (EPLAN)
Supported
Ethernet virtual
private LAN
(EVPLAN)
Not supported
Static MPLS
label
MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN
Supported
VLAN
Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP
Supported
Multicast
listening (IGMP
Snooping)
Supported
Encapsulation
GFP-F (Frame - Mapped GFP)
Link state pass

through (LPT)
Supports
P2P LPT
Link capacity
adjustment
scheme (LCAS)
In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
Committed
access rate
(CAR)
Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Flow control
In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Intra-board link
aggregation
Not
supported
Test frame
Supported
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
24
12
Supports P2P
and P2MP LPT
Supported
Supports P2P
LPT
Not
supported
Supports
P2P LPT
Supported
Supports P2P
and P2MP LPT
Supported
Page 78 of 243

Product Description
Function
N1EFS4
N2EFS4
N1EFS0
N2EFS0
N4EFS0
Ethernet OAM
Not
supported
Supported, in
compliance with
IEEE 802.1ag
and IEEE
802.3ah
Not
supported
Not supported
Supported, in
compliance
with IEEE
802.1ag and
IEEE 802.3ah
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
NSF Function
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Not supported
Supported
Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2

Function
N2EGS2
Interface
2 GE
Interface type
1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board
None
Service frame
format
JUMBO frame
Uplink bandwidth
16 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x12)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
48
EPL
Supported
EVPL
Supported
EPLAN
Supported
EVPLAN
Not supported
Static MPLS label
Stack VLAN
Supported
VLAN
Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP
Supported
Multicast listening
(IGMP snooping)
Supported
Encapsulation
GFP-F
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 79 of 243

Product Description
Function
N2EGS2
LPT
Supports P2P LPT
LCAS
CAR
QoS traffic
classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI flow.
CoS
Supported
Shaping
Supported
Flow control
Test frame
Supported
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Not supported
RMON
Supported
Link aggregation
Supports manual link aggregation
Table 5-3 Function list of EGS4 and EGS4A

Function
N1EGS4
Interface
4 x GE
Interface type
1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board
None
Service frame
format
JUMBO frame
Uplink
bandwidth
16 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x24), VC-4-xv

(x8)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
64
EPL
Supported
EVPL
Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN
Supported
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
N3EGS4
Page 80 of 243

Product Description
Function
N1EGS4
N3EGS4
EVPLAN
Supported
Static MPLS
label
Not supported
VLAN
Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP
Supported
Multicast
listening (IGMP
snooping)
Supported
Encapsulation
GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT
Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
LCAS
BPS
Supported
PPS
Supported
CAR
QoS traffic
classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow.
CoS
Supported
Shaping
Supported
Flow control
Supports flow control based on GE port, in compliance with IEEE

802.3x
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Test frame
Supported
Link
aggregation
Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and

distributed link aggregation.
Supports P2P LPT
Table 5-4 Function list of EMS4

Function
N1EMS4
Interface
4 GE and 16 FE
Interface type
1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T,

100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 81 of 243

Product Description
Function
N1EMS4
Interface board
Supports 4 x GE if it is not used with an interface board.

Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if it is used with interface boards
N1ETF8 and N1EFF8.
Protection
Supports 1+1 intra-board protection and port level protection.
Service frame
format
JUMBO frame
Uplink bandwidth
16 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x24), VC-4-xv

(x8)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
64
EPL
Supported
EVPL
Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN
Supported
EVPLAN
Supported
Static MPLS
label
Not supported
VLAN
Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP
Supported
Multicast
listening (IGMP
snooping)
Supported
Encapsulation
GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT
Supports P2P amd P2MP LPT
LCAS
BPS/PPS
Supported
CAR
QoS traffic
classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and por+SVLAN flow.
CoS
Supported
Shaping
Supported
Flow control
Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with

IEEE 802.3x
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 82 of 243

Product Description
Function
N1EMS4
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Test frame
Supported
Service mirroring
Supported
Link aggregation
Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and

distributed link aggregation.
Table 5-5 Function list of EGT2, EFT8, EFT8A and EFT4

Function
N1EGT2
N1EFT8
N1EFT8A
R1EFT4
Interface
2 GE
16 FE
8 FE
4 FE
Interface type
1000Base-SX,
1000Base-LX,
1000Base-ZX
10Base-T,
100Base-TX,
100Base-FX
10Base-T,
100Base-TX
10Base-T,
100Base-TX
Interface board
None
Supports 8 x FE if
it is not used with
an interface board.
Supports 16 x FE
if it is used with
the N1ETF8 and
N1EFF8 interface
boards.
None
None
Service frame Iformat
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG
JUMBO frame
Supported, 9600
bytes
Supported, 9600
bytes
Supported by the
latter four ports,
9600 bytes
Supported, 9600
bytes
Uplink bandwidth
16 VC-4
8 VC-4
4 VC-4
4 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-3, VC-4,
VC-3-xv (x24),
VC-4-xv (x8)
VC-12, VC-3,
VC-12-xv (x63),
VC-3-xv (x3)
VC-12, VC-3,
VC-12-xv (x63),
VC-3-xv (x3)
VC-12, VC-3,
VC-12-xv (x63),
VC-3-xv (x3)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
16
Ethernet service types
Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported
MPLS
Not supported
VLAN
Transparent transmission
Encapsulation
GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 83 of 243

Product Description
Function
N1EGT2
N1EFT8
N1EFT8A
LPT
Supports P2P LPT
LCAS
CAR
Not supported
Flow control
Test frame
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Not supported
Ethernet performance
monitoring
Supported
R1EFT4
5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH
transmission platform.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:
EPL Service
EVPL Service
EPLAN Service
EVPLAN Service
EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services.
As shown in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the
destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also
protected by the SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable
transmission of services.
Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port
B
PORT2
PORT1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK 1
VCTRUNK 1
PORT2
POTR1
A
A
NE 1
OptiX OSN
equipment
NE 2
Enterprise
user
EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN 1500 adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 84 of 243

Product Description
Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a
bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service
according to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of
Companie A. The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services
Department 1
Headquarters of
company A
VLAN100
VCTRUNK1
VLAN100
PORT1
VLAN200
VCTRUNK2
VLAN200
PORT2
PORT1
Department 2
NE 1
NE 2
OptiX OSN
equipment
Enterprise
user
VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN 1500 adopts three ways to realize
convergence and distribution of EVPL services.
EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 5-3.
EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 5-4.
EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID

B'
B
VLAN200
VLAN200
VCTRUNK
VLAN100
A
PORT1
VLAN100
PORT2
PORT2
NE 1
Community
user
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
PORT1
A'
NE 2
Cyber cafe
user
OptiX OSN
equipment
Page 85 of 243

Product Description
Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS

Add label
PE
Department
B
Strip label
P
PE
PORT2
Department
B
PORT2
VCTRUNK1
Department
A
PORT1
NE 2
NE 1
Department
A
PORT1
Branch 2
Branch 1
OptiX OSN
equipment
Company A
Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ

Add label
C-Aware
Department
B
Strip label
S-Aware
C-Aware
S-Aware
PORT2
Department
B
PORT2
VCTRUNK1
Department
A
PORT1
NE 2
NE 1
Department
A
PORT1
Branch 2
Branch 1
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
EPLAN Service
Though the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically
share a bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 1500
adopts virtual bridge (VB)
to support Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN
service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media
access control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning.
The data packets accessed select the mapping VCTRUNK according to the MAC
address table, as shown in Figure 5-6.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 86 of 243

Product Description
Figure 5-6 EPLAN service

PORT1
VCTRUNK1
VB
Department 3
of company A
Port 1
NE3
VCTRUNK2
PORT1
VB
PORT1
VB
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
Port 1
Port 1
NE 2
NE 1
Department 1
of company A
Access
point
Department 2
of company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
Company A
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and support for the data
packets accessed into the same VLAN. When the data services with the same VLAN
ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN
service can meet the service requirements.
As shown in Figure 5-7, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 adopt
VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.
Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service
VCTRUNK2
Department 3
of company A
PORT2
PORT1
VCTRUNK1
Department 3
of company B
VB1
C-Aware
S-Aware
Port 1 NE3
VCTRUNK2
Port 2
VCTRUNK1
C-Aware
PORT2
PORT1
C-Aware
VB1
LSP
S-Aware
VCTRUNK1
VB1
S-Aware
LSP
NE 1
NE 2
PORT2
PORT1
VCTRUNK2
Port 2
LSP
Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
Department 2
of company B
Department 1
of company A
Department 1
of company B
Acess
point
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Department 2
of company A
Company A
Company B
OptiX OSN
equipment
Page 87 of 243

Product Description
5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 1500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows:
LCAS
STP/RSTP
Tributary protection switching (TPS)
Board protection switching (BPS)
Port protection switching (PPS)
Link aggregation group (LAG)
DLAG
LPT
LCAS
The LCAS provides an error tolerance mechanism to enhance the reliability of the
virtual concatenation function. The LCAS has the following functions:
When the LCAS is applied in the virtual concatenation technology, the LCAS
enables the configuration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of the
concatenated VC quantity, and the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth
(services are not damaged during the dynamic change).
The LCAS protects and restores failed members.
As shown in Figure 5-8, the LCAS can dynamically add or delete members to increase
or decrease the bandwidth. Services are not interrupted during this bandwidth
adjustment.
Figure 5-8 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS
I want another 10 M
bandwidth.
MSTP network
Member
Member
Headquarters
Branch
Member
Member
Branch
Headquarters
New member
OptiX NE
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 88 of 243

Product Description
As shown in Figure 5-9, the LCAS realizes the protection of the Ethernet service.
When some members fail, the faulty members are automatically deleted, whereas
other members transmit data normally. When the faulty members are available again,
they are automatically restored, and the data is loaded to these members again.
Figure 5-9 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS
MSTP network
Member
Member
Branch
Headquarters
Failed
member
Member
Member
Headquarters
Delete failed
member
Branch
OptiX NE
STP/RSTP
The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning
tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the
network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link
protection by restructuring the topology.
TPS
The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a protected
board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. This ensures
a reliable operation of the equipment.
The OSN 1500B supports one group of 1:1 TPS protection for the N2EFS0 or
N4EFS0 board.
BPS
The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all the services
from the active board to the standby board to realize the service protection.
The N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support BPS.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 89 of 243

Product Description
PPS
The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches the services of
one or more affected ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection switching
for the entire board is not necessary.
Compared with the BPS, the PPS has lesser impact on external systems and the
network.
The N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support the PPS.
LAG
A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the same
equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be
regarded as one link.
The LAG provides the following functions:
Improves the link availability. In an LAG, members dynamically back up each

other. When one link is interrupted, other members quickly replace the link to
provide services.
Adds the link bandwidth. The LAG is an economical method for the user to
increase the link transmission rate. When multiple physical links are bundled, the
user is able to obtain a data link of higher bandwidth, without an upgrade of the
existing equipment. The capacity of an LAG is equal to the sum of the capacity of
all the member links.
Balances load. Multiple physical links in an LAG share the traffic load and back
up each other.
Improves the reliability. Members in an LAG dynamically back up each other.
The LAG has three modes: dynamic aggregation, manual aggregation, and static
aggregation. For details, refer to B.4 Link Aggregation.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support link aggregation, and currently
support only manual aggregation and static aggregation.
DLAG
The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is the
protection board.
During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other ports are not
switched. The equipment configured with the DLAG should be connected to the
equipment where the LACP is running. When any intermediate node is between two
equipment sets where the DLAG is configured, the intermediated node should support
the transparent transmission of the protocol packets.
The DLAG can be of modes: revertive or non-revertive.
Revertive mode
If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to the protection board.
When the working board is restored, the DLAG is automatically switched to the
working board.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 90 of 243

Product Description
Non-revertive mode
If the working board becomes faulty, the DLAG is switched to the protection board.
When the working board is restored, the DLAG is not automatically switched to the
working board unless the protection board becomes faulty.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support distributed link aggregation.
LPT
The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network,
when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT
function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT
function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that the working
link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active port to the standby
port. Thus, these services are protected.
The LPT function includes P2P and P2MP LPT.
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP,
SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes. For details, refer to 8.2.2 MSP Ring and 8.2.3
SNCP.
5.2 RPR Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the RPR features of
the OptiX OSN 1500.
The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are
in reverse directions, as shown in Figure 5-10. The outer ring and the inner ring
transmit data packets and control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth
utilization. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the
data packets on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the
control information of the data packets on the inner ring. The two rings protect each
other.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 91 of 243

Product Description
Figure 5-10 RPR ring

Node 1
Outer ring data

Outer ring control
Node 2
Node 4
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Inner ring data

Inner ring control
Node 3
5.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery,
spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.
Basic Functions
The EMR0 and EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 support the RPR features
defined by IEEE 802.17. Table 5-6 lists the basic functions of the RPR boards.
Table 5-6 Function list of RPR boards
Function
N2EMR0
N2EGR2
Interface
1 GE and 12 FE
2 GE
Service frame format
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG
JUMBO frame
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Mapping granularity
VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-xv (X8)
EVPL
Supported
EVPLAN
Supported
Static MPLS label
Stack VLAN
Supported
VLAN
Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the adding, deleting, and

exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q/p.
Spanning tree
Supports RSTP and STP
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 92 of 243

Product Description
Function
N2EMR0
N2EGR2
Multicast listening
(IGMP Snooping)
Supported
RPR protection
Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering

protection schemes, with the protection switching time
being less than 50 ms.
Encapsulation
GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.

LAPS, compliant with ITU-T X.86.
LCAS
Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042
CAR
Flow control
Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X
QoS traffic
classification
The N2EM40 and N2EGR2 boards support traffic

classification based on port, port+VLAN ID or port+VLAN
ID+VLAN PRI.
Intra-board link
aggregation
Supported
Weighted fairness
algorithm
Supported
Topology
auto-discovery
Supported
Maximum number of
nodes
255
Service class
Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR and C
Service Class
The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is
further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR
(committed information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses.
Table 5-7 lists the differences among these classes.
Table 5-7 RPR service class
Class
Subclass
Bandwidth
Jitter
Fairness
Algorithm
Application
A0
Pre-allocated,
irreclaimable
Low
Irrelevant
Real-time services
A1
Pre-allocated,
reclaimable
Low
Irrelevant
Real-time services
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 93 of 243

Product Description
Class
Subclass
Bandwidth
Jitter
Fairness
Algorithm
Application
B_CIR
Pre-allocated,
reclaimable
Medium
Irrelevant
Near real-time
services
B_EIR
Preemptible, not
pre-allocated
High
Relevant
Near real-time
services
Preemptible, not
pre-allocated
High
Relevant
Best effort
transmission
Topology Auto-Discovery
The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to
quickly discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network.
Hence, the topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR.
To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS
function, which realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without
affecting the existing services.
Spatial Reuse
On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial
reuse for ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-11, the bandwidth of a single ring is
1.25 Gbit/s. Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the
destination Node 4, and thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case,
Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 at a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the
bandwidth utilization is improved.
Figure 5-11 Spatial reuse
Node 1
Traffic 1
1.25 Gbit/s
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 2
Node 4
Traffic 2
1.25 Gbit/s
Bandwidth of single ring is

1.25Gbit/s
Node 3
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 94 of 243

Product Description
Fairness Algorithm
The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness
algorithm. The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C
services. The weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes
can have different access rates. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring
and the inner ring separately. In the case of preemptible bandwidth, these two weights
decide the bandwidth at which the node transmits lower-class services on the inner
ring and the outer ring.
As shown in Figure 5-12, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On
the outer ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class
services is 1.2 Gbit/s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for
the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Figure 5-13 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of
Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the
fairness algorithm allocates 200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the
lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Figure 5-12 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1
3
2
Node3
Node4
Node 2
Node 3
Node
Node2
Weight
1
1
1
Node 1
1
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Node 6
Node 5
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Traffic
1
Bandwidth
400 Mbit/s
400 Mbit/s
400 Mbit/s
Page 95 of 243

Product Description
Figure 5-13 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different
3
2
Node 2
1
Node
Node2
Node3
Node4
Weight
1
3
2
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Node 6
Node 5
Traffic
1
2
3
Bandwidth
400 Mbit/s
600 Mbit/s
200 Mbit/s
5.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN
services.
EVPL Service
The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and
encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format.
Figure 5-14 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional
EVPL service. Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the
packet onto the RPR. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which
then strips the packet.
Figure 5-15 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification
is based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of
Node 1.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 96 of 243

Product Description
Figure 5-14 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping
Node 1
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
FE/GE
Node 2
FE/GE
Node 4
Action
Tunnel
VC
LSP
Action
Tunnel
Insertion
100
VC
Destination
100
Node 4
Node 3
Action
Stripping
100
100
Forwarding
Figure 5-15 EVPL service convergence

Traffic
Tunnel
VC
Destination
Port1+VLAN 2
Port1+VLAN 3
Port1+VLAN 4
200
300
400
200
300
400
Node 2
Node 3
Node 4
VLAN 3
VLAN 2
GE
VLAN 4
Node 1
FE
VLAN 2
Node 2
Node 4
FE
VLAN 4
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 3
FE
VLAN 3
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and
encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service
is realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the
self-learning of source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.
Figure 5-16 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets
are accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node
determines the forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if
the destination MAC address of the packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 97 of 243

Product Description
Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the packets are forwarded through Port 2. If
the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are forwarded onto the RPR
through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100. Node 2 forwards
packets in the same way.
Figure 5-16 RPR EVPLAN service
A2
A1
MAC forwarding table of node 1

Port 2
Port 1
MAC
A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
Node 1
B1
Port 1
stack VLAN
none
none
100
100
100
Dual-ring
A2
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 2
B2
Port
port 1
port 2
rpr1
rpr1
rpr1
Node 4
Port 2
MAC forwarding table of node 2
Node 3
Port 1
C1
MAC
A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
Port
rpr1
rpr1
port 1
port 2
rpr1
stack VLAN
100
100
none
none
100
5.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 1500 are protected by various protection
schemes.
The protection schemes of the RPR services include:
Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering
LCAS
RSTP
Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and

SNCTP
Wrapping
When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an automatic
loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect the inner ring
and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages
of this protection scheme are enhanced protection speed and minimal loss of data,
and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth.
Figure 5-17 illustrates the wrapping protection. The traffic is sent from Node 4, passes
through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches Node 1. When there is a fiber cut
between Nodes 2 and 3, they perform an automatic loopback to connect the inner ring
and the outer ring, so that the protection is realized.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 98 of 243

Product Description
Figure 5-17 Wrapping protection

Node 2
Fiber cut
Traffic flow
X
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 6
Node 4
Node 5
Steering
In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the
source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is
generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring
is less than 16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The
advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The
disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the protection switching speed
is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated.
Figure 5-18 illustrates the steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, the
traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally reaches
Node 1, through the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, the
topology auto-discovery protocol discovers a new topology. On the basis of this new
topology, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and
finally reaches Node 1, through the inner ring.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 99 of 243

Product Description
Figure 5-18 Steering protection

Node 2
Fiber cut
Traffic flow before
switching
X
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Traffic flow
after switching
Node 1
Node 6
Node 5
Wrapping+Steering
In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring
first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and decrease the
packet loss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a new ring topology,
the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination
through the best route. This reduces the waste of bandwidth.
Figure 5-19 illustrates the wrapping+steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the
ring, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and finally
reaches Node 1, through the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2
and 3, a wrapping switching is first performed so that Nodes 2 and 3 are automatically
loopbacked. After the topology auto-discovery protocol discovers a new topology, a
steering switching is performed. As a result, the traffic passes through Nodes 5 and 6
in turn, and finally reaches Node 1, through the inner ring.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 100 of 243

Product Description
Figure 5-19 Wrapping+steering protection

Node 2
Fiber cut
Traffic flow
X
Node 1
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 6
Node 4
Node 5
Node 2
Fiber cut
Node 3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Traffic flow
after switching
Node 1
Node 6
Node 5
LCAS
The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects the
bandwidth.
For details about the LCAS, refer to section 5.1.3 Protection.
RSTP
The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP realizes
link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically
modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 101 of 243

Product Description
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP,
SNCP, SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used.
5.3 ATM Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of
the OptiX OSN 1500.
5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4,
ADQ1, IDL4, and IDQ1.
An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an N1ADQ1
board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the
N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3
ATM services.
Table 5-8 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards.
Table 5-8 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1
Function
ADL4
ADQ1
Front panel
interface
1 x STM-4
4 x STM-1
Optical interface
specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and

Ve-1.2
Connector type
LC
Optical module
type
SFP
E3 ATM interface
Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, or

N1PL3A board.
IMA
Not supported
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4
ATM switching
capability
1.2 Gbit/s
Mapping mode
VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (x4)
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM
connections
2048
Traffic type and

QoS
IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 102 of 243

Product Description
Function
ADL4
ADQ1
Supported ATM
multicast
connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection
(ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring
OAM function
(ITU-T I.610)
AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)
An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board
can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1
processing board, the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services.
Table 5-9 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards.
Table 5-9 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1
Function
N1IDL4
N1IDQ1
Front panel interface
1 x STM-4
4 x STM-1
Optical interface
specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
Connector type
LC
Optical module type
SFP
E3 ATM interface
Not supported
IMA (compliant with

ATM Forum IMA 1.1
standards)
Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1

processing board N1PQ1, N1PQM, or N2PQ1.
Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services.
Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the ATM port.
Each IMA group supports 132 E1 services. Supports the mapping of a
maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any IMA group) to the ATM port.
Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4
ATM switching
capability
1 Gbit/s
Mapping mode
VC-12, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (X4)
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM
connections
2048
Traffic type and QoS
IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 103 of 243

Product Description
Function
N1IDL4
N1IDQ1
Supported ATM
multicast connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection (ITU-T

I.630)
Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring
OAM function (ITU-T

I.610)
AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check)
Board level 1+1

protection
Supported, with switching time less than 1s
5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
Supported Services and Traffic Types

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR services, but does
not support ABR services.
The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit
emulation services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed
transmission bandwidth and latency.
The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate.
The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission.
The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 1500 meets IETF
RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See
Table 5-10.
Table 5-10 ATM service types and traffic types
No.
Traffic Type
Service Type
Parameter
atmNoTrafficDescriptor
UBR
None
atmNoClpNoScr
UBR.1
Clp01Pcr
CBR
Clp01Pcr
atmClpNoTaggingNoScr
CBR
Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
atmClpTaggingNoScr
CBR
Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
atmNoClpScr
nrt-VBR.1
Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs
atmClpNoTaggingScr
nrt-VBR.2
atmClpTaggingScr
nrt-VBR.3
atmClpTransparentNoScr
CBR.1
Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 104 of 243

Product Description
No.
Traffic Type
Service Type
Parameter
atmClpTransparentScr
rt-VBR.1
Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs,

Cdvt
10
atmNoClpTaggingNoScr
UBR.2
Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
11
atmNoClpNoScrCdvt
UBR
Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
CBR
Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
12
atmNoClpScrCdvt
rt-VBR.1
Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs,

Cdvt
13
atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
rt-VBR.2
Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
14
atmClpTaggingScrCdvt
rt-VBR.3
Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services

When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service
processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate
NEs, only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In
this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central
node, the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.
As shown in Figure 5-20, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively
occupy a VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively
occupies a VC-4 bandwidth. Only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3.
After the three services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM
board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 105 of 243

Product Description
Figure 5-20 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services
DSLAM
34M ATM
Traffic
Service
Convergence
NE 1
2.5 Gbit/s SDH
Ring
155M ATM
Traffic
622M ATM
Traffic
NE 4
NE 2
Router
DSLAM
NE 3
34M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM
Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services

The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical
multiplexing for ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC
(VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv) path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.
As shown in Figure 5-21, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and
sends it to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1).
Then, after the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the
cross-connect board. NE2 accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and
then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the
ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2 for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally
accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream are encapsulated into the same
VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar.
One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 106 of 243

Product Description
Figure 5-21 VP-Ring/VC-Ring

DSLAM
The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to
the NE2, and then sent to VP/VC-Ring
after converged with local service.
155M ATM Traffic
DSLAM
34M ATM
Traffic
NE 1
NE 4
VC4-Xv VP/
VC-Ring
Route
r
622M ATM
Traffic
NE 2
NE 3
34M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM
Application of IMA Services

The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM
integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links
are multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow.
The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface
of the E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not
process service types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer
are transparently transmitted.
Figure 5-22 illustrates the IMA service networking.
Figure 5-22 IMA service networking
RNC
NE1
T2000
40km
25km
NodeB 1
NE2
STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional
MSP ring
NE4
NodeB 4
30km
35km
NE3
NodeB 2
NodeB 3
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 107 of 243

Product Description
5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 1500 are protected at several layers.
The protections that are available are as follows:
ATM layer protections
Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and

SNCTP
1+1 board level protection for IMA boards
ATM Layer Protections

Compliant with ITU-T I.630, the ATM layer, protections are classified in different ways,
as listed in Table 5-11. You can select a combination of the following protection types
as required, for example, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection.
Table 5-11 Classification of ATM protection
Classification Scheme
Protection Type
Bridging function
1+1 protection
1:1 protection
Switching direction
Unidirectional protection
Bidirectional protection
Connection level
VPC protection
VCC protection
Protection domain
Trail protection
SNCP, SNCMP, SNCTP
Revertive mode
Revertive protection
Non-revertive protection
Protected object
Single connection
protection
Group connection
protection
Optical Transmission Layer Protections

The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical
transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP. You can set the hold-off time for the ATM protection switching. In this way,
when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical
transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the protection of the
working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not
performed).
1+1 Board Level Protection for IMA Boards

The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection. For the
configuration of 1+1 board level protection, the IDQ1 and IDL4 boards must be
inserted in paired slots.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 108 of 243

Product Description
5.4 SAN Features

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing
board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and
DVB-ASI services.
The detailed description of the N1MST4 board is as follows:
The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All the
port connectors are of the LC (SFP) type.
Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and
FC200) services, with the total bandwidth of not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board
also supports the full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one
FC200 service or two FC100 services are supported.
The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH
side. FC100 supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km.
The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client
side. FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.
Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON or 4 x DVB-ASI
services.
All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T
G.7041. All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).
Table 5-12 lists the service types and bit rates provided by the N1MST4 board.
Table 5-12 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4
Service Type
Bit Rate
Remarks
FC100/FICON
1062.5 Mbit/s
SAN service
FC200
2125 Mbit/s
SAN service
ESCON
200 Mbit/s
SAN service
DVB-ASI
270 Mbit/s
Video service
5.5 DDN Features

This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX
OSN 1500.
5.5.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 1500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12
interface board to access and process DDN services.
The N1DX1 board processes 8 x 64 kbit/s services and eight framed E1 services
and realizes the service convergence. The N1DX1 also cross-connects N x 64
kbit/s signals at the system side.
The N1DXA board cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 109 of 243

Product Description
The N1DM12 board accesses framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/s services when it works
with the N1DX1 board.
Table 5-13 lists the functions and features of the DDN boards.
Table 5-13 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA
Board Feature
N1DX1 (N1DM12)
N1DXA
Processing
capability
Processes 8 x 64 kbit/s and eight framed

E1 services, and cross-connects 48 x 64
kbit/s signals at the system side.
Cross-connects 63 x 64 kbit/s signals

at the system side.
Bandwidth at
SDH side
48 x E1.
63 x E1.
Interface
specifications
N x 64 bit/s interface: RS449, EIA530,

EIA530-A, V.35, V.24 and X.21.Framed
E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4.
None.
Interface
impedance
75 ohms or 120 ohms.
None.
Connector type
The connectors are on the DM12 board.

The DB28 connector is used for N x 64
bit/s signals, and the DB44 connector is
used for framed E1 signals.
None.
Protection
Supports 1:N TPS protection with the

switching time being less than 50 ms.
Not supported.
Loopback
Supports inloop and outloop for all the

ports.
Supports inloop and outloop for all

the ports.
PRBS self-test
Supported.
Not supported.
Alarm and
performance
A large number of alarms and

performance events are provided to
facilitate the equipment management and
maintenance.
A large number of alarms and

performance events are provided to
facilitate the equipment management
and maintenance.
5.5.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX
OSN 1500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so
various services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1
can be accessed to a transmission network.
Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers
Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
Access and convergence of multipoint routers
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 110 of 243

Product Description
The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for
small-sized and medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and
security service halls.
5.5.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN
services are switched to the protection board. This ensures the reliable operation of
the equipment.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports one group of 1:N (N2) TPS protection for the N1DX1
boards.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 111 of 243

Product Description
DCN Features
6.1 Overview
The element management system (EMS) sets up communication with NEs through a
data communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these NEs.
In a DCN, the EMS and NEs are regarded as network nodes, which can be connected
through Ethernet or physical data communication channels (DCCs).
In practical networking, the EMS and NEs can be located on different floors in a
building, in different buildings, or even in different cities. Therefore, the connection
between the EMS and NEs usually requires an external DCN that consists of
equipment such as LAN switch and routers. On the other hand, the DCN among NEs
is referred to as an internal DCN. This section describes the internal DCN that
consists of SDH NEs. See Figure 6-1.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 113 of 243

Product Description
Figure 6-1 DCN network
T2000
IP/OSI
DCN
External DCN
HW ECC or
IP/OSI over
DCC
Internal DCN
OptiX optical transmission equipment

LAN switch
6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN

With the development of network scale, OAM of a network becomes more and more
difficult. A stable and robust DCN management network helps reduce the OAM cost.
In a DCN, the DCC bytes in SDH overheads are used as physical channels for DCN
management. The customer does not need to set up private DCN channels so the
network construction cost is considerably reduced. For a DCN, the SDH provides the
following bandwidth:
By using the D1D3 bytes in SDH regenerator section overheads (RSOH), the
SDH provides a 192 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
By using the D4D12 bytes in SDH multiplex section overheads (MSOH), the
SDH provides a 576 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
By using the D1D12 bytes in SDH section overheads, the SDH provides a 768
kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
Figure 6-2 shows the positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 114 of 243

Product Description
Figure 6-2 Positions of DCC bytes in SDH overheads

A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
J0
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
*
RSOH
AU PTR
B2
B2
B2
K1
K2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
M1
MSOH
E2
6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides multiple DCN solutions.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the DCN networking by using the following protocols:
HWECC
TCP/IP (IP over DCC)
OSI (OSI over DCC)
The HWECC protocol is a private protocol developed by Huawei to support the DCN
networking of OptiX equipment. The HWECC protocol features easy configuration and
application. As it is a private protocol, HWECC protocol does not meet the
management requirements for hybrid networking by using the equipment from other
vendors.
The TCP/IP and OSI protocols are standard communication protocols that solve the
management issue in the case of hybrid networking with equipment from other
vendors. These two protocols can also be used in a network that consists of only
Huawei equipment.
When OptiX equipment is interconnected with other vendors equipment that does not support
the TCP/IP and OSI standard communication protocols, Huawei provides the transparent
transmission function for DCC bytes, and provides relevant Ethernet service channels to
transparently transmit the OAM information.
6.1.3 DCC Resource Allocation Modes

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports different DCC resource allocation modes.
Table 6-1 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 115 of 243

Product Description
Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 1500

DCC Allocation
Q2CXL/R1CXL
Channel type
Supports the D1D3 and D4D12 channel types.
Operation
mode
Q3CXL
Mode 1
Supports 40 D1D3
channels.
Supports 80 D1D3
channels.
Mode 2
Supports 10 D1D3
channels.
Supports 20 D1D3
channels.
Supports 10 D4D12
channels.
Supports 20 D4D12
channels.
Supports 22 D1D3
channels.
Supports 44 D1D3
channels.
Supports 6 D4D12
channels.
Supports 12 D4D12
channels.
Supports 28 D1D3
channels.
Supports 32 D1D3
channels.
Mode 3
Mode 4
Supports 4 D4D12
channels.
Protocol type
Supports HWECC, IP and OSI protocols.
Default mode
Mode 1
The Q3CXL/R1CXL board can also provide two 2 Mbit/s external clock interfaces,
which can be used to transparently transmit DCC information. For details, refer to 2.20
DCC Transparent Transmission Through External Clock Interfaces.
6.2 HWECC
The equipment supports the HWECC protocol, which is a private protocol defined by
Huawei.
6.2.1 Features
The HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX
equipment.
In hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors, the HWECC protocol is not
able to identify the OAM information from other vendors equipment, but can
transparently transmit such OAM information. By using the existing DCC resources,
the user is able to meet the requirements of a centralized management of equipment.
The HWECC protocol has the following features:
The protocol provides a flexible networking environment.
NEs can be connected through optical interfaces or Ethernet interfaces for

embedded control channel (ECC) communication.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 116 of 243

Product Description
The protocol provides transparent transmission for the OAM information from
other vendors' equipment.
In the OptiX OSN 1500, each slot supports a maximum of eight ECC channels.
6.2.2 Application
The HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.
OAM Information Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment Only

When OAM information is transmitted only among the OptiX OSN equipment, a
gateway NE is required for the communication with the T2000. The T2000 is
connected to the gateway NE through the Qx interface and tests, manages and
maintains the entire network.
The T2000 system helps improve the network service quality, lower the maintenance
cost, and ensure a reasonable use of network resources. A non-gateway NE is
connected to the gateway NE through ECC, to realize the transmission of the OAM
information.
In some cases, extended ECC communication through Ethernet interfaces is also
available among NEs. See Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC
PC
HUB1
GNE1
N
NE6
E6
NE2
NE5
NE3
Network cable
NE4
Subnet1
HUB2
NE7
NE12
NE8
NE11
NE9
NE10
Subnet2
Fiber
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment

When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM
information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted through
D4D12 bytes of the OptiX OSN equipment. See Figure 6-4.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 117 of 243

Product Description
Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC)
D4-D12
D1-D3
Transparent
transmission
Third party
equipment
D1-D3
Third party
equipment
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment

When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM
information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted through
D4-D12 bytes of the equipment. See Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC)
Third party
equipment
D4-D12
Third party
equipment
Transparent
transmission
D1-D3
D1-D3
6.3 IP Over DCC

The equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol.
6.3.1 Features
The OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network management information by using
the IP over DCC protocol.
The IP over DCC protocol has the following features:
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
The TCP/IP protocol realizes the compatibility with the equipment from other
vendors. In this case, the network management is simplified.
Page 118 of 243

Product Description
The Layer 3 functions of protocol stacks are adopted. In this case, additional
overheads or server trails are not required for the transmission of the OAM
information of other vendors equipment.
The protocol provides flexible networking modes.
Several application layer protocols are supported.
6.3.2 Application
The IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by the
third-party equipment, by using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (IP)
Third party
equipment
IP over DCC
Third party
equipment

information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX
OSN equipment, by using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-7.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 119 of 243

Product Description
Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment (IP)
Third party
equipment
Third party
equipment
IP over DCC
Third party
equipment
Third party
equipment
6.4 OSI Over DCC

The equipment supports the OSI over DCC protocol.
6.4.1 Features
The OSI over DCC protocol is used for hybrid networking between the OptiX OSN
equipment and other optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC.
The OSI over DCC protocol has the following features:
In a transmission network that consists of equipment from different vendors, the

OSI over DCC protocol enables the transparent transmission of OAM information
at the network layer, and thus provides a more flexible networking.
The user does not need to set up additional DCN channels. The existing DCC
resources realize the centralized management of equipment from different
vendors.
6.4.2 Application
The OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by
third-party equipment, by using the OSI over DCC protocol.
As shown in Figure 6-8, Huawei equipment is located at the network edges, and the
equipment from other vendors is located in the backbone network. The OAM
information between the T2000 and the OptiX OSN equipment needs to be forwarded
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 120 of 243

Product Description
by the equipment from other vendors. In this case, each subnet that consists of the
Huawei equipment must have a minimum of one gateway NE.
Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by the third-party equipment (OSI)
OSI
protocol
stack
Third party
equipment
OSI
protocol
stack
OSI over DCC
Third party
equipment
OSI
protocol
stack

information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX
OSN equipment, by using the OSI over DCC protocol.
As shown in Figure 6-9, the Huawei equipment is located in the backbone network,
and the equipment from other vendors is located at the network edges. The OAM
information between the network management system and the equipment of other
vendors needs to be forwarded by the Huawei equipment.
In actual application, a network cannot always be divided in this manner. A more common
hybrid networking is that the equipment from different vendors coexists at the core layer and the
peripheral layer.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 121 of 243

Product Description
Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment
(OSI)
Third party
equipment
Third party
equipment
OSI protocol stack

OSI
protocol
stack
OSI over DCC
Third party
equipment
OSI protocol
stack
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Third party
equipment
Page 122 of 243

Product Description
ASON Features
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies

The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the
control links and TE links.
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links

The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses
the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about
its own control links to the entire network. See Figure 7-1. As a result, each NE
obtains the information of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the
information about the network-wide control topology. The following figure shows the
details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes
these routes into the route forwarding table, which is used for the signaling RSVP to
transmit and receive packets.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 123 of 243

Product Description
Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links

ASON domain
When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically
discover the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the
management system for real-time display. See Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Management of control topology
R4
R1
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 124 of 243

Product Description
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links

The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP,
the TE link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the
entire network through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that
is, the network-wide resource topology.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the
deletion and addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports
the change to T2000, which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 7-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology
displayed on the NM in real time.
Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery
R4
R1
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration

The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very
convenient.
The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON
services. To configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node,
sink node, bandwidth requirement, and protection level. Service routing and
cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically completed by the
network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and excluded link
to constrain the service routing.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 125 of 243

Product Description
Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing
and signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure
services.
For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and
I in Figure 7-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures
cross-connection at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A
to I, the network calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is
assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.
The service is created as follows:
Choose the bandwidth granularity.
Choose the server level.
Choose the source node.
Choose the sink node.
Create the service.
Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration
R4
R1
E
I
F
C
A
B
H
R2
G
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration

The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and
network security.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability.
Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not
need to reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy
increasingly large bandwidth demand. In addition, this networking mode also provides
more than one recovery route for each services so it can best utilize the network
resources and enhance the network security.
As shown in Figure 7-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network
calculates another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 126 of 243

Product Description
Figure 7-5 Trail restoration
R4
R1
E
I
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
7.4 ASON Clock Tracing

ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock
tracing mode. In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON
clock tracing mode. In this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
In an ASON clock subnet, each ASON NE automatically traces the best clock source.
The clock is then automatically traced and switched. In this way, clock interlock is
avoided. In addition, the clock configuration is simplified. For an ASON domain with
many ASON NEs, several ASON clock subnets should be created if more than 20
ASON NEs are on the clock tracing link in a clock subnet. Each ASON clock subnet
generates its own clock tracing relation to trace the primary source in the local subnet.
In each ASON clock subnet, the change of primary source and link does not affect the
clock tracing relation in other ASON clock subnets. Generally, one ASON clock subnet
is created in one ASON domain.
Advantages of the ASON Clock Tracing

The ASON clock tracing has the following advantages.
Simple configuration: For one ASON clock subnet, only the primary clock need be
created to realize auto-tracing and auto-switching of the clock.
Auto-tracing and auto-switching: In an ASON clock subnet, the clock has the
auto-tracing and auto-switching features.
The ASON tracing avoids the clock interlock.
Clock Protection Protocol

To realize the ASON clock tracing, all ASON NEs within the ASON clock subnet must
start the standard SSM protocol.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 127 of 243

Product Description
Primary Reference Clock Source

Within the ASON clock subnet, the ASON software automatically sets the clock
tracing relation. At the edge of an ASON clock subnet, the external clock source, or
internal clock source of edge NEs should be manually set as the primary reference
clock source for the ASON clock subnet. The following clock sources can be set as
the primary clock reference source.
Line clock source
External clock source
Internal clock source of edge NEs
For one ASON clock subnet, several primary reference clock sources can be set. The
ASON clock subnet, however, traces only one of these primary reference clock
sources. The other clock sources back up the traced clock source. When the selected
primary reference clock source fails, the entire subnet automatically traces another
backup primary reference clock source. In this way, a new clock tracing tree is
established. A priority should be set for the primary reference clock source.
As shown in Figure 7-6, in an ASON clock subnet, primary and secondary clock
sources are configured at NE A and NE B respectively. Other ASON NEs in the ASON
clock subnet automatically create clock tracing trees by computation. In this way, the
entire subnet traces the primary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.
When the primary BITS fails, each ASON NE creates the clock tracing tree by
re-computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the secondary BITS and all
clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.
Figure 7-6 ASON clock subnet
BITS
BITS
Primary base
clock source
Standby base
clock source
:ASON NE
: BITS
Interfacing Mode
By default, the ASON software automatically creates the clock tracing tree according
to the network topology. In this way, each ASON NE then can automatically trace an
available clock source. If necessary, set the interfacing mode of some optical
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 128 of 243

Product Description
interfaces to the clock quality not detected mode to adjust the clock tracing tree. In this
way, these optical interfaces are excluded from the options of the clock tracing
sources for ASON NEs.
Regeneration Source
A regeneration source is a device used to regenerate clock signals. If an NE is
configured with such a device, the system tracing clock of the NE is strengthened and
the quality of the out-link clock is increased. During the computation for creating the
clock tracing tree, the clock signals strengthened by the regeneration source are
selected with priority.
For configuration of the regeneration source, 2M input and output interfaces are used.
An NE receives the upstream clock signals and outputs them to the regeneration
device. The regenerated clock signals then return to the NE through the 2M input
interface. The clock then works as the system tracing clock for the NE. In this way,
clock signals are strengthened and the line clock signals output from the NE are also
strengthened.
Clock Tracing Relation in the ASON Clock Subnet

The clock tracing relation in the ASON clock subnet is as follows:
The ASON clock subnet take priority to trace the primary source of the highest
clock quality.
If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality, the ASON
clock subnet traces the primary reference clock source of the highest priority.
If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality and priority,
the ASON clock subnet traces the clock source in the trail with the least hops to
generate multiple clock tracing trees. In this way, too long clock tracing trail is
avoided.
If all the primary reference clock sources are invalid, the ASON clock subnet
traces the internal clock source with the smallest node ID. Thus, clocks in the
entire network are synchronized.
Hybrid Network of the ASON Clock Subnet and Traditional Clock Subnet
If the traditional clock subnet works in the SSM disabled mode, you should configure
the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock
subnet.
If the traditional clock network works in the standard SSM mode, you should configure
only the quality of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock subnet works in the extended SSM mode, you should only
modify the subnet to the standard SSM mode, and then form a hybrid network with the
ASON clock subnet.
Modifying the Traditional ASON Subnet to the ASON Clock Subnet

If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the SSM
disabled mode, you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the quality
and priority of the primary reference clock source.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 129 of 243

Product Description
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the standard
SSM mode, you should directly create the ASON clock subnet and configure the
priority of the primary reference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the extended
SSM mode, you should modify the extended SSM mode to the standard SSM mode.
Then you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the
primary reference clock source.
7.5 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the
service protection, as listed in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Service level
Service
Protection and
Restoration Scheme
Implementation
Means
Switching and
Rerouting Time
Diamond
service
Protection and
restoration
SNCP and
rerouting
Switching time < 50ms
Gold service
Protection and
restoration
MSP and rerouting
Switching time < 50ms
Silver
service
Restoration
Rerouting
Rerouting time < 2 s
Copper
service
No protection
Iron service
Preemptable
MSP
No restoration
Table 7-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.

Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services
Service Level
Working Resource
of TE Link
Protection Resource
of TE Link
Non-Protection
Resource of TE Link
Diamond
service
Service creation
Not used
Not used
Used
Service
rerouting
Not used
Used when the

resource is not enough
Used with the priority
Service
optimization
Not used
Not used
Used
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 130 of 243

Product Description
Service Level
Working Resource
of TE Link
Protection Resource
of TE Link
Non-Protection
Resource of TE Link
Gold
service
Service creation
Used with the

priority
Not used
Used when the

Service
rerouting
Used with the

priority
Used when the

Used when the

Service
optimization
Used with the

priority
Not used
Used when the

Service creation
Not used
Not used
Used
Service
rerouting
Not used
Used when the

Service
optimization
Not used
Not used
Used
Service creation
Not used
Not used
Used
Service
optimization
Not used
Not used
Used
Service creation
Not used
Used when the

Silver
service
Copper
service
Iron
service
7.6 Diamond Services

Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources
in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond
services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking,
security and aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink
node. It is also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different
LSPs available between the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be
as separate as possible. One is the working LSP and the other is the protection LSP.
The same service is transmitted to the working LSP and the protection LSP at the
same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives the service from the
working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.
Figure 7-7 shows a diamond service.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 131 of 243

Product Description
Figure 7-7 Diamond Services

Working LSP
R4
R1
E
D
I
F
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
Protection LSP
: ASON NE
: User equipment
There are three types of diamond services.

Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.
Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.
Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 7-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services
Attribute
Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between

the source node and the sink node.
Protection and
restoration
If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always

available for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is
the active LSP and the other is the standby LSP.
If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be

reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure
the service survivability.
Supports rerouting lockout.
Supports rerouting priority.
Supports three rerouting policies:
Rerouting
Use existing trails whenever possible

Do not use existing trails whenever possible
Best route
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 132 of 243

Product Description
Attribute
Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Revertive
Revertive services support reverting to the original route

automatically.
Non-revertive services support reverting to the original

route manually.
Supports migration between permanent SNCP

connections and diamond services.
Supports migration between diamond services and silver

services.
Supports migration between diamond services and

copper services.
Service migration
Service switching
Supports manual switching.
Service optimization
Supports service optimization.
Service association
Does not support service association.
ASON server trail
Does not support diamond ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger
rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,

AU_AIS
Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Attribute
Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for
creation

the source node and the sink node
Protection and
restoration
When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched.

Rerouting is not triggered.
When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the

standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting
is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting

Best route
Revertive
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)

automatically.

route manually.
Page 133 of 243

Product Description
Attribute
Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Service migration


services.
Supports migration between diamond services and copper

services.
Service switching
Service association
ASON server trail
Does not support diamond ASON server trails
Alarms to trigger
rerouting

AU_AIS
Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Attribute
Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Requirements for
creation

the source node and the sink node
Protection and
restoration
When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the

standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched.

Rerouting is not triggered.
When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting
is not triggered.


services.

services.
Service migration
Service switching
Service association
ASON server trail
Does not support diamond ASON server trails.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 134 of 243

Product Description
7.7 Gold Services

Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with
diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links
or non-protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is
cut, the ASON triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex
section protection fails, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.
As shown in Figure 7-8, a gold service can be configured from A to I.
Figure 7-8 Gold services
R4
R1
MSP
I
D
MSP
A
B
MSP
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 7-6 lists the attributes of gold services.

Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services
Attribute
Gold Service
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources

are available between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex section
protection
Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear

multiplex section protection chain to create gold services.
Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber

bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create
gold services.
Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber

bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create
gold services.
Protection and
restoration
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is

performed to protect services. When MS switching fails,
rerouting is then triggered to restore services.
Page 135 of 243

Product Description
Attribute
Gold Service
Rerouting

Best route
Revertive

automatically.

route manually.
Preset restoring trail
Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Service migration
Supports migration between permanent connections and

gold services.
Supports migration between gold services and silver

services.
Supports migration between gold services and copper

services.
Service switching
ASON server trail
Supports gold ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger
rerouting

AU_AIS
7.8 Silver Services

The service restoring time ranges from hundred milliseconds to a few seconds. The
silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low
real-time requirement.
Silver services are also called rerouting services. Upon an LSP failure, periodical
rerouting is performed until the rerouting succeeds. If there are not enough resources,
service may be interrupted.
As shown in Figure 7-9, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G
is cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the
cut fiber. Hence, services are protected.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 136 of 243

Product Description
Figure 7-9 A silver service
R4
R1
E
I
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 7-7 lists the attributes of silver services.

Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services
Attribute
Silver Services
Requirements for
creation

the source node and the sink node.
Service restoration
When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to

create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting

Best route
Revertive

automatically.

route manually.
Preset restoring trail
Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Shared mesh
restoration trail
Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for

revertive silver trials.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 137 of 243

Product Description
Attribute
Silver Services
Service migration
Supports migration between permanent connections

and silver services.
Supports migration between diamond services and

silver services.
Supports migration between gold services and silver

services.
Supports migration between silver services and copper

services.
If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be

optimized before reverting to its original route.
Service association
Supports service association.
ASON server trail
Supports silver ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger
rerouting

AU_AIS
7.9 Copper Services

The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the
abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do
not reroute and are interrupted. Table 7-8 lists the attributes of copper services.
Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services
Attribute
Silver Service
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the

source node and the sink node.
Service
restoration
Does not support rerouting.
Service migration
Supports migration between permanent connections and

copper services.

services.
Supports migration between gold services and copper

services.
Supports migration between silver services and copper

services.
Service
optimization
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 138 of 243

Product Description
Attribute
Silver Service
Service
association
Supports service association.
ASON server
trail
Supports ASON server trails.
7.10 Iron Services

The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured
as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the
services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply
non-protection resources or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs.
When an LSP fails, services are interrupted and rerouting is not triggered.
When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS
switching occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted.
After the MS is recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption,
preemption and restoration of the iron service are all reported to the T2000.
When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network
resources are insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted
silver service or diamond service. Thus, the service is interrupted.
Table 7-9 lists the attributes of iron service.

Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services
Attribute
Iron Service
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are

available between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex section
protection
To create iron services, the following resources can be used:

Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP
Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP
Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Service
restoration
Does not support rerouting.
Service migration
Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent

connections.
Service
optimization
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 139 of 243

Product Description
7.11 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as
ASON server trails.
When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The
protection level for the tunnel can be gold, silver or copper. Then, use the
management system to complete the configuration of the lower order service. See
Figure 7-10.
Figure 7-10 Tunnel
VC4 tunnel
VC12 service
R4
R1
R3
R2
: ASON NE
ASON domain
: User equipment
The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service

types. Its cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be
configured manually. As shown in Figure 7-11, there is a tunnel between NE1 and
NE2 which can be a gold ASON server trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON
server trail. During service creation, the ASON automatically chooses the line boards
of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line boards.
After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order
cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or
optimization of the tunnels, however, the cross-connections at the source and sink
nodes automatically switch to the new ports.
In addition, the end-to-end tunnel and lower order service can be created.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 140 of 243

Product Description
Figure 7-11 Lower cross-connection
ASON server trail
VC12
VC4
NE1
VC12
NE2
Cross-connection
VC12
Tributary unit
Line unit
Table 7-10 lists the attributes of tunnels.

Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels
Attribute
Gold Tunnel
Silver Tunnel
Copper Tunnel
Requirements
for creation
Same as gold services
Same as silver
services
Same as copper
services
Service
restoration
Same as gold services
Same as silver
services
Does not support

rerouting
Rerouting
Supports rerouting
lockout.
Supports
rerouting lockout.
Supports rerouting
priority.
Supports
rerouting priority.
Does not support

rerouting
Revertive
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Pre-configurat
ion of
restoring
route
Not supported
Supported
Not supported
Service
association
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Service
migration
Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent

connections.
Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels.
Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels.
Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.
Service
optimization
Supports service optimization..
Tunnel level
VC-4
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 141 of 243

Product Description
7.12 Service Association

The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from
different points into the ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes.
During the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the
route of the associated service. Service association is mainly used for services
(dual-source) accessed from two points.
As shown in Figure 7-12, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber
between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.
Figure 7-12 Service association
R4
R1
E
D
11protection
I
F
11protection
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 7-11 lists the attributes of service association.

Table 7-11 Attributes of service association
Attribute
Service Association
Service
optimization
Supports optimization of associated services.
Rerouting
When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated

service.
Service type
Supports the association of two silver services.
Supports association of two copper services.
Supports the association of a silver service and a copper

service.
Supports the association of two silver tunnels.
Supports the association of two copper tunnels.
Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 142 of 243

Product Description
7.13 Service Optimization

After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory
routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a
new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original
LSP to change and optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the
service route can be restricted during the service optimization.
LSP optimization has the following features.
Only manual optimization is supported.
The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.
During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are

not allowed.
During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting

operations, optimization is not allowed.
The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper
and tunnel services.
7.14 Service Migration

OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON
services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion,
which would not interrupt the services.
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections

Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections
Migration between gold services and permanent connections
Migration between silver services and permanent connections
Migration between copper services and permanent connections
Migration between iron services and permanent connections
Migration between tunnel services and server trail.
Service Migration between ASON Trails

Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
Migration between diamond services and silver services
Migration between diamond services and copper services
Migration between silver services and copper services
Migration between gold services and silver services
Migration between gold services and copper services
Migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels
Migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels
Migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 143 of 243

Product Description
7.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes

After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original
routes. You can revert all service to the original routes.
The operation reverting network-wide services to original routes interrupts the

services. Be cautious to perform the operation.
Original Route
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON
service. If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the
services can be adjusted to the original route manually or automatically. In addition,
the current route can be set to the original route after rerouting of the ASON services.
ASON services are classified into revertive services and non-revertive services. If the
original route recovers after rerouting, the revertive services can be manually or
automatically reverted to the original route. If the original route recovers after rerouting,
the non-revertive services can be only manually reverted to the original route. Before
the non-revertive services revert to the original route, the resources of the original
route may be used by other services.
Revertive Services
The ASON services supporting the service reverting are as follows:
Diamond services
Gold services
Silver services
Tunnels
Description on Service Reverting

For the detailed description of reverting, refer to the Table 7-12.
Table 7-12 Reverting service to original routes
Attribution
Non-Revertive Service
Revertive Service
Prerequisites
The original route has no

failures and has free timeslots.
The original route has no

failures.
Reverting
mode
Manually reverting.
Manually reverting or
automatically reverting.
Batch
reverting
Supported.
Not supported.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 144 of 243

Product Description
Attribution
Non-Revertive Service
Revertive Service
Timeslots
Only if the original timeslots in

the original route are spare and
is "Reverting to original
timeslots" set, the service can
revert to the original timeslots.
Services reverting to original

routes. Services reverting to
original timeslots.
Modifying
original route
Supported.
Supported.
Reversion
lock
Supported.
7.16 Preset Restoring Trail

Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail
failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for
restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing.
The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for a diamond/silver/gold
ASON trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset
restoring trail.
7.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of
rerouting, the silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a
restoration trail is called a shared mesh restoration trail.
When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service
uses the resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh
restoration trail are usable, these resources are used for service restoration. If only
partial resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are
used with priority for computation of a restoration trail. The other resources may be
faulty or used by other services that share the trail.
As shown in Figure 7-13, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver
services share the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver
service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh
restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertive silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the
service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver
services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared mesh restoration trail, for
the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 145 of 243

Product Description
Figure 7-13 Shared mesh restoration trail

Revertive silver service 1
A
Share MESH
restoration trail 1
G
H
Share MESH
restoration trail 2
Revertive silver service 2
Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.
Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh
restoration trail.
A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at

different levels.
For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive
attribute cannot be changed.
The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected
resources of TE links.
For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set
the preset restoration trail.
Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration

Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following
differences.
For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no
resources are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration
trail may be used by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset
restoration trail cannot be used.
For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The
reserved resources cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can
be restored with the best effort. In addition, to increase the resource utilization,
the shared mesh restoration trails for different services can share some
resources.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 146 of 243

Product Description
7.18 Equilibrium of Network Traffic

The ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible.
The ASON calculates a best route according to the CSPF algorithm. If there are many
services between two nodes, there may be several services sharing a same route.
The traffic equilibrium function is used to avoid this situation. As shown in Figure 7-14,
there are many silver services between R2 and R4. To make the network more safe
and reliable, the ASON allocates them to different routes averagely as possible such
as A-D-E-I, A-B-C-F-I and A-B-G-H-I.
Figure 7-14 Traffic equilibrium
R4
R1
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
7.19 Shared Risk Link Group

In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in
one cable.
The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the
same risks, that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service
should not be rerouted to another link that has the same risk.
Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the
network so as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the
faulty link share the same risk and to shorten the service restoration time during
ASON service rerouting. You can change the SRLG attribute.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 147 of 243

Product Description
7.20 ASON Trail Group

The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
LCAS
LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of
VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in
Figure 7-15, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1
and two over path 2. If the VC4 in path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all
Ethernet service without affecting the service of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on
either path if necessary.
Figure 7-15 LCAS (different path)
Path 1
VCTRUNK1
Router A
Router B
NE1
NE2
Path 2
If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the
service. As shown in Figure 7-16, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4
fails, the Ethernet service remains unaffected.
Figure 7-16 LCAS (same path)
VCTRUNK1
NE1
NE2
Router B
Router A
ASON Trail Group

An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within
one LSP group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To
provide virtual services with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as
separate as possible.
Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each
ASON trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and
sink. The trails must also be as separated as possible.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 148 of 243

Product Description
7.21 Protocol Encryption

You can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of
the network.
An external entity may modify the OSPF-TE protocol packets of the network,
counterfeit a node of this network and transmit packets, or receive the packets
transmitted by nodes in the network and repeat the attack. To prevent these network
insecurities, the ASON provides the function to encrypt protocols. In an ASON domain,
the RSVP and OSPF-TE protocols are encrypted for authentication.
The RSVP authentication is configured for nodes and the OSPF-TE authentication for
interconnected interfaces (slots and optical interfaces).
The authentication can be non-authentication, plain text authentication or MD5
authentication.
The check succeeds only when the authentication modes and passwords of adjacent
nodes are the same.
7.22 Alarms of the Control Plane

To increase the network maintainability, the ASON network supports the reporting
alarms of the control plane.
Alarms on the control plane include node alarms, link alarms and service alarms.
Node alarms indicate whether the node ID and authentication code are correct, and
whether the node ID and authentication code are associated with neighbors. Link
alarms indicate the link availability, and whether the configuration of link timeslot and
MS is correct. Service alarms indicate whether the services are interrupted, whether
the service level is downgraded, and whether the service trail is changed.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 149 of 243

Product Description
Protection
8.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards
and 1+1 protection for power supplies.
8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards

The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
Table 8-1 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 8-2 lists the
TPS protection parameters.
Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards
Service Type
Protection Scheme
Supported Boards
E1/T1
One 1:N protection (N 2)
N1PQM, N1PQ1, N2PQ1a
E1
Two 1:N protections (N 2)
R1PD1, R2PD1
E3/T3/E4/STM-1
One 1:1 protection
N1PD3, N1PL3, N2PD3,

N2PL3, N2PQ3, N1SPQ4,
N2SPQ4, N1SEP
DDN
One 1:N protection (N 2)
N1DX1
Ethernet
One 1:1 protection
N2EFS0, N4EFS0
a: The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.
Table 8-2 TPS protection parameters

Parameter
Description
Priority
1X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is

the highest priority.
Switching type
Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 151 of 243

Product Description
Parameter
Description
Switching condition
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:

The clock of the working board is lost.
The working board is offline.
The working board is cold reset.
The hardware of the working board fails.
A switching command is issued.
Switching time
50 ms
Revertive mode
Revertive
WTR time
300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.
8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect, Timing and SCC
Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect, timing and SCC units, the equipment
can run in a safe manner.
For the OptiX OSN 1500, the cross-connect, timing and SCC units are integrated in
the CXL series boards. The CXL series boards adopt a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so
that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table 8-3 lists the 1+1 hot
backup parameters of the cross-connect, timing and SCC units.
Table 8-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect, timing and SCC units
Parameter
Description
Slots for working and

protection boards
Slot 4 is for the working board and slot 5 is for the

protection board.
Switching condition
Revertive mode
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
The working board is cold reset.
The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is

triggered.
Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original

protection board becomes the working board, and the
original working board becomes the protection board.
Page 152 of 243

Product Description
8.1.3 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards

The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG
protection.
Table 8-4 lists the 1+1 protection parameters for Ethernet boards.
Table 8-4 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards
Parameter
BPS, PPS

protection boards
Configurable according to the requirement.
Switching condition
Any of the following conditions

triggers the switching:
Switching time
DLAG
Any of the following conditions triggers

the switching:
The port status of the working

board is Link Down.
The port status of the working board is

Link Down.
The clock of the working board

is lost.
The clock of the working board is lost.
The hardware of the working board

fails.
The working board is off line.
The hardware of the working

board fails.
The working board is off line.
350 ms
In full duplex mode: 3 s

In auto-negotiation mode: 500 ms
When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS protection switching, the
following conditions must be met.
The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same
working mode as the protection group.
The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through
optical fibers or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present
between the two ends.
The working mode should not be modified before the protection group is deleted.
Otherwise, the protection group becomes abnormal.
The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end
of the protection group.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 153 of 243

Product Description
8.1.4 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards

The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 1500 support board level 1+1
protection.
Table 8-5 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.
Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards
Parameter
Description

protection boards
Configurable as required.
Switching condition

A manual switching command is issued.
The working board is under a cold reset.
The power supply of the working board fails.
The clock of the working board fails.
Revertive mode
Non-revertive
Switching time
50 ms
8.1.5 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit

The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can access two 48 V DC power supplies by using two R1PIU
or R1PIUA boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other.
When either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal
operation of the equipment.
8.1.6 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit

The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
In the OptiX OSN 1500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has
two types: One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and
selective receiving.
A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and
one board of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single
receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot
backup protection.
Table 8-6 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 154 of 243

Product Description
Table 8-6 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX

Parameter
Description

protection boards
Configurable as required.
Switching condition

Revertive mode
Non-revertive
Switching time
50 ms
8.1.7 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply

The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this
protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of
other boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit
on the R1AUX or R2AUX board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup
power supply immediately provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the
board.
8.1.8 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions

The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection
and overvoltage protection.
Power-Down Protection During Software Loading

The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is
interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or
data that are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the
loading to be resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply

The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the
damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.
When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the
software can re-initialize the chip.
The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can
affect services. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to
unstable voltages, the value can be restored to normal.
When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the
power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 155 of 243

Product Description
Board Temperature Detection

Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and
timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high
temperature, an alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about
cleaning the fans.
8.2 Network Level Protection

The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI
protection.
8.2.1 Linear MSP

The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching,
1+1 dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings.
The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 1500 provides 1+1
and 1:N (N14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 12 linear MSPs. In
the 1:N protection scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the
protection system. The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in
ITU-T G.841.
For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines.
Table 8-7 lists the linear MSP parameters.
Table 8-7 Linear MSP parameters
Protection
Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Protocol
Switching
Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
1+1
single-ended
switching
Non-revert
ive
Not
required
50 ms
1+1
single-ended
switching
Revertive
Not
required
50 ms
600s
Any of the
following
conditions
triggers the
switching:
1+1
dual-ended
switching
Non-revert
ive
APS
protocol
50 ms
1+1
dual-ended
switching
Revertive
1:N
dual-ended
switching
Revertive
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
APS
protocol
APS
protocol
50 ms
50 ms
600s
600s
R_LOS
R_LOF
MS_AIS
B2_EXC
B2_SD
(optional)
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
Page 156 of 243

Product Description
8.2.2 MSP Ring

The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP
ring.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP
rings, with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
Table 8-8 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 1500.
For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines.
Table 8-8 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 1500
Protection Scheme
Maximum Number of MSP Rings

Supported
STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring
STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring
Table 8-9 lists the MSP ring parameters.

Table 8-9 MSP ring parameters
Protection
Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching Mode
Two-fiber
bidirectional
MSP
Revertive
Forced switching
Manual switching
Exercise switching
Two-fiber
unidirectional
MSP
Revertive
Forced switching

Four-fiber
bidirectional
MSP
Revertive
Switching
Time
Default
WTR Time
Switching
Condition
50 ms
600s
Any of the
following
conditions triggers
the switching:
50 ms
600s
R_LOS
Manual switching
R_LOF
Exercise switching
MS_AIS
B2_EXC
Manual switching ring
B2_SD
(Optional)
Exercise switching ring
Forced
switching
Forced switching span
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
Forced switching ring
Manual switching span
Exercise switching span
50 ms
600s
The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 1500 has the following features.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 157 of 243

Product Description
Adjustable MS Bandwidth
The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain.
In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 1500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by
VC-4 without interrupting services. For an STM-16 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS
bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to eight VC-4s. For an STM-16 four-fiber
bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 16 VC-4s.
Upgradeable MS Bandwidth
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without
interrupting services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an
STM-16 MSP ring without interrupting services.
Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section

For STM-16 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 1500 is able to process two sets of K
bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up in one optical
interface.
MS Squelching
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4
level.
In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by
extra traffic. When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a
node to be isolated from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to
preempt this timeslot. As a result, the misconnection of services occurs. When extra
traffic is transmitted in the protection path, the traffic on the working path may preempt
the protection timeslot that is being used by extra traffic, even if only one point fails in
the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs.
To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 1500 node sets up a detailed list
of connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the
automatic protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance
the possibility of misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then
discards these services that may be misconnected.
8.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), the
subnetwork connection multipath protection (SNCMP), and the subnetwork
connection tunnel protection (SNCTP), for subnetworks that meet the ITU-T G.841
requirements.
SNCP
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected
trail and an SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 8-1.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 158 of 243

Product Description
Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected

trail
The unprotected trail
NE2
NE1
NE6
NE3
NE5
NE7
NE4
NE8
Convert to an unprotected trail
Convert to an SNCP-protected trail
The working trail
NE2
NE1
NE6
NE3
NE5
NE4
NE7
NE8
The protection trail
In the trail management window of the T2000, you can convert an exiting unprotected
trail to an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an
SNCP-protected trail to an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level
operations are supported:
Manual switching to protection path
Manual switching to working path
Forced switching to protection path
Forced switching to working path
Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting
Revertive mode setting
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 159 of 243

Product Description
Table 8-10 lists the SNCP parameters.

Table 8-10 SNCP parameters
Protection Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Time
Default
WTR Time
Switching
Conditions
SNCP
Revertive
50 ms
600s
Non-revert
ive
50 ms
Any of the following

conditions triggers
the switching:
R_LOS
R_LOF
AU_LOP
TU_LOP
MS_AIS
AU_AIS
TU_AIS
HP_UNEQ
(Optional)
HP_TIM (Optional)
B2_EXC
B3_EXC
(Optional)
B3_SD (Optional)
BIP_EXC
BIP_SD
SNCMP
The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path)
protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1
protection scheme.
The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service
protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective
receiving at the sink. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP.
Figure 8-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts
services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according
to the service priority and then the service quality. When services are correctly
received on both the working and protection paths, the sink selects the service from
the working path.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 160 of 243

Product Description
Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection

A
B
Working
Protection 1
Source
Protection 2
Sink
Intermediate
subnetworks
Protection 3
In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 8-3, two protection paths protect a working
path, and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission
media. Under normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.
Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking
NE 3
NE 4
Protection 1
NE 2
NE 1
Microware
Radio
Working
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure
8-4, NE3 receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 161 of 243

Product Description
Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure
NE 3
NE 4
Protection 1
NE 2
NE 1
Microware
Radio
Working
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both
become faulty, as shown in Figure 8-5, NE3 receives the service from the second
protection path Protection 2.
Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure
NE 3
NE 4
Protection 1
NE 2
NE 1
Microware
Radio
Working
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
SNCTP
The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is
faulty, all its services can be switched to the protection path.
The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only
the entire VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 162 of 243

Product Description
When the working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all
services in the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant
only to lower order services, lower order alarms are raised, and the switching does not
occur.
8.2.4 DNI
The DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T
G.842.
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of
inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings,
which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different
protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node
failure.
The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:
Two SNCP rings
An SNCP ring and an MSP ring
Two MSP rings
Figure 8-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings.

Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings
NE A
SNCP
Ring 1
NE C
NE D
NE E
NE F
SNCP
Ring 2
NE G
Selecting Point
Forward Working Routing
Reverse Working Routing
When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 163 of 243

Product Description
A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1.
A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2.
A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings.
NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty.
NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty.
NE C and NE E are faulty.
NE D and NE F are faulty.
The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is
faulty, inter-ring services are not affected.
8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection

When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-16, STM-4 or even
STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order
channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to
form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as
the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly.
Figure 8-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
STM-4
SNCP
STM-16
STM-16
STM-4
MSP
8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP

In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into
multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical
interface.
A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to
process multiple sets of independent K bytes. N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16 and
N1SF16 of the OptiX OSN 1500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. An
STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes.
Figure 8-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by
the OptiX OSN 1500.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 164 of 243

Product Description
Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP
STM-4
STM-4
Optical-pathshared MSP ring
STM-4
STM-16
STM-4
Optical-pathshared MSP ring
STM-4
STM-4
For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as
shown in Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines
MSP ring 1
STM-4
MSP ring 2
STM-16
STM-4
STM-16
The OptiX OSN 1500 also supports the line units of the same rate to form a shared
protection in two directions, as shown in Figure 8-10. In this case, the west STM-16
line units can only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group.
Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate
MSP ring 1
MSP ring 2
STM-16
STM-16
STM-16
STM-16
8.2.7 RPR Protection

The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
Figure 8-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The
outer ring and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The
control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on
the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of
the data packets on the inner ring.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 165 of 243

Product Description
The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the
packets added to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path
is used. A node can only perform three types of operations on the packets, that is,
insertion (adding a new packet onto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and
stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet
ring considerably decreases the communication traffic among nodes. This is because
a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every single packet.
Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR
Node 4
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 5
Node 3
RPR
Node 1
Node 2
In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for
packets.
The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that
are adjacent to the fiber cut point. See Figure 8-12.
Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection
Node 4
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 5
Node 3
RPR
Node 1
Node 2
Wapping
The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case
of a fiber cut. See Figure 8-13.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 166 of 243

Product Description
Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection

Node 4
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 3
Node 5
RPR
Node 1
Node 2
Steering
In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse
direction, and the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection
switching, the wrapping function is usually performed first. After the new topology and
the new service trail are created, the steering function is then performed. Such a
mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during the protection switching, and that
the protection switching time is decreased.
8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection

The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
Figure 8-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The
VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be
applied on any physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes
and bandwidths.
Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
NE2
ATM service
NE1
Working path
Protection path
ATM service
NE3
NE4
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels
(VCs), and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving
mechanism. Two connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the
protection path, are set up at the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal
conditions, the receive end selects the service from the working path. When the
primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects the failure and triggers the
protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the protection path,
and thus the ATM service is protected.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 167 of 243

Product Description
Clock
9.1 Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace different types of clock sources, which are as follows:
External clock source
Line clock source
Tributary clock source
Internal clock source
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports priority setting for clock sources. By default, the
internal clock source is of the lowest priority.
9.1.1 External Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 1500 support two external clock source inputs.
Two 75-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Two 120-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
9.1.2 Line Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace the line clock source.
9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 1500 can trace tributary clock sources.
The specific tracing relation is as follows.
When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port
(corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the
ninth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PQ1, PQM and PD1.
(corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the
fourth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PD3, PQ3.
(corresponding to the first physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PL3,
DX1.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 169 of 243

Product Description
(corresponding to any physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the SPQ4.
9.1.4 Internal Clock Source

When all the line, tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable,
or when only the internal clock source is available in the priority list, the OptiX OSN
1500 uses the internal clock source as the system clock.
9.2 Clock Working Mode

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T
G.781. The modes are as follows:
Locked mode
Holdover mode
Free-run mode
9.2.1 Locked Mode

In the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 1500 traces one clock source from the line clock
source, tributary clock source and the external clock source.
9.2.2 Holdover Mode

If all the clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 1500 uses the frequency information
stored before the clock source is lost. The frequency information complies with the
related phase standard defined in ITU-T G.813.
9.2.3 Free-Run Mode

The OptiX OSN 1500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal
oscillator whose frequency stability is not lower than 4.6 ppm.
9.3 Clock Outputs

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock
outputs.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the following clock outputs:
Line clock outputs
Tributary clock outputs
External clock outputs

For tributary clock outputs, the OptiX OSN 1500 supports the tributary retiming function, which
helps improve the quality of the output tributary clock.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports two external clock outputs:

Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Two 75-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
Page 170 of 243

Product Description
Two 120-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

For external clock outputs, only two 75-ohm or two 120-ohm clocks can be used, but both the
clocks cannot be applied.
9.4 Clock Protection

The OptiX OSN 1500 provide the function for managing the SSM. The standard SSM
and extended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provide the synchronization status message (SSM) function for
synchronous clocks. Either the standard SSM or the extended SSM can be configured
to realize the protection switching of clocks.
9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled

In the case of the OptiX OSN 1500, when the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the
S1 byte is not used. In this case, the clock sources are selected or switched according
to the priority list. The clock source with the highest priority is the tracing source.
The priority list can be manually configured. Figure 9-1 shows the clock configuration
and the priority list when the SSM is not enabled.
Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled
BITS
Slot 8
Node 2
Priority 1: Slot 11
Priority 2: Slot 8
Priority 3: Internal
Slot 11
Slot 11
Slot 8
Slot 8
Slot 11
Slot 11
Clock
tracing
Node 1
Priority 1: BITS
Node 4
Priority 1: Slot 8
Priority 2: Slot 11
Slot 8
Node 3
Priority 1: Slot 11
Priority 2: Slot 8
9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled

The standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 1500 to choose the clock source of the
highest quality to prevent the generation of clock tracing ring.
Figure 9-2 shows the application of the standard SSM.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 171 of 243

Product Description
Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM

BITS
Node 1
Fiber
break
Slot 8
Slot 11
Slot 11
Slot 8
Node 2
Node 4
Slot 8
Slot 11
Slot 11
Slot 8
Node 3
Node 3, N ode 2 automatically select
Clock the clock source of the highest quality.
tracing
9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled

The standard SSM cannot prevent the clock lock ring in all cases. In this case, Huawei
provides the concept of the clock source ID.
The extended SSM uses the first four bits of the S1 byte as the clock source ID and
the latter four bits to indicate the quality of the clock source. The first four bits of the S1
byte is used to specify the unique ID of a clock source. These four bits are transmitted
along with the SSM. When receiving the S1 byte, a node checks if the clock source ID
is transmitted by itself. If the clock source ID is transmitted by itself, the node
considers the clock source as unavailable. In this way, this avoids the occurrence of
the clock lock ring.
Figure 9-3 shows the clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled.
Figure 9-4 shows the application of the clock source ID when the extended SSM is
enabled.
Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled
BITS
BITS
failure
Node 1
Node 2
BITS
Node 1
Node 4
Node 3
Node 2
Clock mutual tracing
caused by BITS failure
Node 4
Node 3
Clock
tracing
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 172 of 243

Product Description
Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID

BITS
BITS failure
Node 1
Node 2
Node 4
Node 3
Node 1 finds that the ID sent from Node 4 is
1, which is originated from itself. Node 1 will
not trace it to avoid the clock mutual tracing.
Clock tracing
A clock source ID can be manually set. In the case of the configuration of clock
protection for an SDH ring network, the clock ID is always manually set, to effectively
avoid the occurrence of clock lock ring. The clock ID occurs only at key nodes rather
than all the nodes in an SDH network. To set the clock source ID, do as follows:
Allocate a clock ID for every external BITS.
Allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every node that has an external
BITS.
In case of signals that travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a
clock ID for the internal clock source of every junction node.
In case of signals that travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a
clock ID for the line clock source (if any line source is involved at a junction node)
in the direction that the signal travels at every junction node.
9.5 Tributary Retiming

The retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing
signals from a digital synchronization network, and then to transmit the signals to the
receiver.
9.5.1 Retiming Principle

With the retiming technology, the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to
transmit reference timing signals.
Figure 9-5 shows the retiming principle.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 173 of 243

Product Description
Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram

SDH clock
source
SEC
PLL
f1
Input tributary signal
Extract clock f0
Extract clock f1
Desynchronization
Retiming buffer
f0
Output
tributary signal
The retiming function is performed in the following process:

The phase-lock loop (PLL) is used to extract clock f1 from the received tributary
signals.
The desynchronization function is used to recover the tributary signal data in an

error-free manner, and then to store the data in the retiming buffer.
The SDH equipment clock (SEC) f0, which is synchronous with the digital
synchronization network, is extracted and then added into the tributary signal
data.
In this way, the output tributary signals carry a good timing reference, which serves
the synchronous service equipment.
9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function

PDH signals can pass through an SDH network with or without retiming.
PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network Without Retiming

Figure 9-6 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network without retiming.
On the synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to
avoid a periodical slip. When PDH signals are adapted into the SDH transmission
network, pointer justifications cause phase jumps of output PDH signals, and thus
frequency f1 of the output PDH signals becomes asynchronous with f0. As a result, the
frequency of output signals cannot be used as a timing reference for equipment k,
such as a digital stored program control (SPC) switch.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 174 of 243

Product Description
Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming

SDH transmission network
PRC
f1
Synchronous
service
equipment i
f0
f0
S
f1
S
S
D
SDH
MUX
SDH
MUX
f1
Synchronous
service
equipment k
f 1: PDH signal frequency

f 0 : Frequency that traces an SDH PRC
S: Synchronization
D: Desynchronization
R: Retiming
PRC: SDH primary reference clock
The tributary signal frequency

cannot be used as a synchronization
clock for equipment k.
PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network with Retiming

Figure 9-7 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network with retiming. On
the synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid a
periodical slip. At the network output end, the retiming function provides a local timing
reference f0, and thus jitters and wanders caused by pointer justifications are
absorbed. Frequency f1 of the output PDH signals is still synchronous with f0, so
equipment k can extract tributary timing signals for the synchronization purpose.
Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming
Transmission network
PRC
f1
Synchronous
service
equipment
i
f0
f0
S
f1
S
S
D
SDH D
MUX D
SDH
MUX
D R
f1: PDH signal frequency

f0: Frequency that traces an SDH PRC
S: Synchronization
D: Desynchronization
R: Retiming
PRC: SDH primary reference clock
SEC: SDH equipment clock
f0
SEC
f0
Synchronous
service
equipment
k
The tributary signal frequency can

be used as a synchronization clock
for equipment k.
The transmission network in Figure 9-7 can be a single SDH network, or a

combination of several SDH and PDH networks.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 175 of 243

Product Description
10
OAM
10.1 Operation and Maintenance

The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 1500 system are designed
according to the customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of
the equipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 1500 system provides powerful equipment
maintenance capability for customers.
Alarm and Performance Management

In the case of any emergency, the CXL board generates audible and visual
alarms to prompt the network administrators to take proper measures.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides three alarm input interfaces, one alarm output
interface to facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment.
Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network
administrators to locate and handle faults quickly.
The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically

monitored. After detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant
alarms.
The working temperature of some boards can be queried.
When the MSP or TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a

performance event is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service
administrator focuses on the service state only.
ALS Function
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the
SDH and Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces.
When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is
generated at the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for
500 ms, the laser of the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically
shut down. By default, the laser pulse is generated at the 60-second interval and
lasts for 2s every time.
After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end
detects the laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical
interface at the opposite end then continuously launches laser beams. After
receiving the laser beams launched by the opposite end, the laser of the local
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 177 of 243

Product Description
end then also continuously launches the laser beams. As a result, the two optical
interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarm is cleared.
Optical Power Management

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH
and Ethernet optical interfaces.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH
optical module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface
type, fiber mode (single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance,
transmission rate and wavelength.
The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose
single-mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement. This
facilitates the maintenance.
The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.
Multiple Maintenance Methods

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the orderwire phone function for management
personnel at different node sites to communicate with each other.
The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and
alarms of each NE in a network.
The in-service upgrade of the board software and the in-service loading of NE
software are supported. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely
loaded with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the
equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone
network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 1500 system.
The N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1, line boards and Q3CXL1/4/16 support the PRBS
test and the remote bit error test.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This
function reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this
function, the user is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually interrupt
the collection according to the requirement.
The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the board version replacement function. This
helps to replace the board of an old version with the board of a new version. After
the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board
are the same as the configuration and service status of the old version board.
Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically
detect faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults.
The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and
controlled. After a board is inserted, it does not work if the total power
consumption of the boards exceeds the power consumption threshold of the
equipment.
The port status can be queried.
10.2 Network Management

The OptiX OSN 1500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000
transmission network management system. The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH,
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 178 of 243

Product Description
Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T
Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and
the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with
the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and
management over the network equipment.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP),
which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different
vendors.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 179 of 243

Product Description
11
Security Management
11.1 Authentication Management

Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.
NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a

valid user name and a valid password.
NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each
time. For this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE
simultaneously, they need to be switched to ensure that the data is unique.
Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by
simultaneous configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from
illegally logging in to the NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at
lower level exit from the NE.
NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower
than that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE.
NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to
prevent other users from operating the locked modules.
Query the online NE users.
11.2 Authorization Management

Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful
operations performed by each user and the security of the NE system.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
NE user management:
According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels,
which involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system
level, and debugging level in an ascending order.
According to the T2000, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE
users, CMD NE users, and general NE users.
Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag.
Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority,
or change the user flag.
Delete NE users.
Page 181 of 243

Product Description
NE user group management:
According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided

into administrator group, super administrator group, operator group,
monitoring personnel group, and maintenance personnel group.
Modify the group of a user.
11.3 Network Security Management

Safe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000
to effectively manage the NEs.
The T2000 communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL)
protocol. Therefore, the data is complete and safe.
Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the
network, and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the
ACL rule is divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.
For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule
only to check the source address of the IP packets only.
For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL
rule. In this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source
port, sink port, and protocol type of the received IP packets.
If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the
advanced ACL rule to check the packets.
Query the ACL rule.
Modify the ACL rule.
Delete the ACL rule.
An NE can access the T2000 by using any of the following methods:
Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the T2000 to

access it over the Ethernet network.
Access through the serial interface.
Access through the OAM port.
Access through the COM port. Owing to the security, after an NE is initialized
or downloads data, by default, the COM access function is disabled. The COM
access function can be enabled when necessary.
Control the access to NEs by using LCT: If the T2000-LCT needs to be used to
manage NEs, you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the
T2000.
When the T2000 communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user
name and password) is encrypted.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 182 of 243

Product Description
11.4 System Security Management

Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be
executed forcibly.
Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE.
Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report
an alarm after a user logs in to the NE.
Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password.
Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts.
Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts.
Query or set the password uniqueness.
11.5 Log Management

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides log management functions.
11.5.1 NE Security Log Management

The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the
operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the
operations.
Query the security logs of the NE.
Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.
11.5.2 Syslog Management

The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an
NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are
transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog)
protocol.
The OptiX OSN 1500 supports:
Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol
Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP
Adding and deletion of Syslog servers
Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers
at the same time
Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog

server and the NE
Figure 11-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the
security of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available
in a network. Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and
the system log servers. The communication between NEs can be realized through
several methods, for example, ECC mode or IP over DCC mode.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 183 of 243

Product Description
Figure 11-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting

NE B
NMS
NE A
(client)
NE C
(client)
ECC/ IP OVER DCC
TCP/IP
real time
security log
Syslog Server A
Syslog Server B
NE D
Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system
logs of all NEs in a network.
A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the
system log server. In Figure 11-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.
When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly

communicate with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence,
configure the IP addresses and port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to
transmit the NE logs to the two Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of
IP protocol. No forwarding gateway NE is required.
When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not
directly connect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs
of the NE must be transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the
Syslog servers through ECC. Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by
the gateway NE. Hence, the forwarding gateway NE must be configured, for example,
configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NE for NE D.
For detailed Syslog configuration procedures, refer to the OptiX OSN 1500 Optical
Transmission System Configuration Guide.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 184 of 243

Product Description
12
Technical Specifications
12.1 Interface Types

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports optical interfaces of different types.
Table 12-1 lists the optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Interface Type
Rate and Feature
SDH optical
interface
155520kbit/s, 622080kbit/s, 2488320kbit/s, 2666057 kbit/s
Ethernet interface
10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,

1000Base-ZX
ATM interface
34368 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s, 622080 kbit/s
PDH/SDH electrical
interface
1544 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s, 34368 kbit/s, 44736 kbit/s, 139264

kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s
DDN electrical
interface
RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1
Clock interface
OptiX OSN 1500A:

Two 120-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
OptiX OSN 1500B:
Alarm interface
Three alarm input interfaces, one alarm output interfaces,

alarm concatenated interfaces, four cabinet alarm indicator
interfaces
Auxiliary interface
Administration interface, orderwire interface, data interface
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 185 of 243

Product Description
12.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports SDH optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces and
ATM optical interfaces. This section lists the specifications of these optical interfaces.
12.2.1 SDH Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types.
Table 12-2 lists the specifications for the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN
1500.
Table 12-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item
Specification
Nominal bit rate
155 520 kbit/s
Classification code
I-1
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
0 to 2
2 to 20
20 to 60
60 to 80
80 to
100
Operating
wavelength (nm)
1260 to
1360
1260 to
1360
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Type of optical
source
MLM
MLM
MLM
MLM/SL
M
SLM
SLM
Mean launched
power (dBm)
15 to
8
19 to
14
15 to
8
5 to 0
5 to 0
3 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
23
31
28
34
34
34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
14
10
10
10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
10
8.2
10
10
10
1500.
Item
Specification
Nominal bit rate
622 080 kbit/s
Classification code
I-4
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission distance
(km)
0 to 2
2 to 20
20 to 50
50 to 80
80 to
100
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 186 of 243

Product Description
Item
Specification
Operating wavelength
(nm)
1261 to
1360
1274 to
1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Type of optical source
MLM
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Mean launched power

(dBm)
15 to 8
15 to
8
3 to 2
3 to 2
3 to 2
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
23
28
28
28
34
Minimum overload (dBm)
13
Minimum extinction ratio

(dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10.5
1500.
Item
Specification
Nominal bit rate
2 488 320 kbit/s
Classification
code
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
L-16.2(Je)
V-16.2(Je
) (BA)
U-16.2(Je)
(BA+PA)
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 25
25 to 50
50 to 80
80 to 105
105 to
145
145 to 200
Operating
wavelength (nm)
1266
to
1360
1260 to
1360
1280 to
1335
1500 to
1580
1530 to
1560
1530 to
1565
1550.12
Type of optical
source
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Mean launched
power (dBm)
10 to
3
5 to 0
2 to 3
2 to 3
5 to 7
Without
BA: 2 to
3
Without
BA and
PA: 2 to
3
With BA:
13 to 15
With BA:
15 to 18
28
Without
BA and
PA: 28
Receiver
minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
18
18
27
28
28
With PA:
32
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 187 of 243

Product Description
Item
Specification
Minimum overload
(dBm)
Without
BA and
PA: 9
With PA:
10
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
chromatic
dispersion
12
1200 to
1600
2000
2800
3400
(ps/nm)
Table 12-5 lists the specifications for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX
OSN 1500.
Table 12-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item
Specification
Nominal bit rate
2 666 057 kbit/s
Classification code
Ue-16.2c
Ue-16.2d
Ue-16.2f
Code contenta
SF16+BA(14dB)+
PA
SF16+BA(17dB)+
PA
SF16+BA(17dB)+RA+PA
Operating wavelength (nm)
1550.12
1550.12
1550.12
Mean launched power (dBm)
Without BA and
PA: 5 to 1
Without BA and
PA: 5 to 1
Without BA, RA and PA:

5 to 1
With BA: 13 to 15
With BA: 13 to 15
With BA: 15 to 18
Without BA and
PA: 27.5
Without BA and
PA: 27.5
Without BA, RA and PA:

27.5
With PA: 37
With PA: 37
With PA: 42
Minimum overload point (dBm) b
10
10
10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) c
10
10
10
Receiver minimum sensitivity

(dBm)
a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter, for example, BA (14) indicates that the optical power
of the signal after it is amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC+BA+PA" indicates that the optical interface specifications
include FEC, BA and PA.
b: The parameter is that of the PA.
c: Parameters in the table are of the optical modules, excluding the amplifiers.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 188 of 243

Product Description
The STM-16 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500 can output wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the
WDM system. Table 12-6 lists the wavelengths and frequencies of the STM-16 optical
interfaces.
Table 12-6 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 optical interfaces
No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
192.1
1560.61
21
194.1
1544.53
192.2
1559.79
22
194.2
1543.73
192.3
1558.98
23
194.3
1542.94
192.4
1558.17
24
194.4
1542.14
192.5
1557.36
25
194.5
1541.35
192.6
1556.56
26
194.6
1540.56
192.7
1555.75
27
194.7
1539.77
192.8
1554.94
28
194.8
1538.98
192.9
1554.13
29
194.9
1538.19
10
193.0
1553.33
30
195.0
1537.40
11
193.1
1552.52
31
195.1
1536.61
12
193.2
1551.72
32
195.2
1535.82
13
193.3
1550.92
33
195.3
1535.04
14
193.4
1550.12
34
195.4
1534.25
15
193.5
1549.32
35
195.5
1533.47
16
193.6
1548.51
36
195.6
1532.68
17
193.7
1547.72
37
195.7
1531.90
18
193.8
1546.92
38
195.8
1531.12
19
193.9
1546.12
39
195.9
1530.33
20
194.0
1545.32
40
196.0
1529.55
Table 12-7 lists the specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN
1500.
Table 12-7 Specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item
Specification
Nominal bit rate
2 488 320 kbit/s
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
2 666 057 kbit/s
Page 189 of 243

Product Description
Item
Specification
Dispersion limit (km)
170
640
640
Mean launched power (dBm)
2 to 3
5 to 1
5 to 1
Receiver minimum sensitivity

(dBm)
28
28
28
Minimum overload point

(dBm)
Maximum chromatic
dispersion (ps/nm)
3400
12800
12800
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
OSNR
Without FEC: 21
With FEC: 16
Without FEC: 21
12.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types.
The specification of the Ethernet optical interface of the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment
comply with IEEE 802.3 standards. Table 12-8 lists the specifications.
Table 12-8 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces
Interface
Type
Type of
Optical
Source
Transmittin
g Optical
Power
(dBm)
Central
Wavelength
(nm)
Minimum
Overload
Point (dBm)
Receiver
Minimum
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Extinction
Ratio (dB)
1000Base-Z
X (70 km)
MLM
4 to 2
1480 to
1580
22
1000Base-Z
X (40 km)
MLM
2 to 5
1270 to
1355
23
1000Base-L
X (10 km)
MLM
9 to 3
1270 to
1355
19
1000Base-S
X (0.55 km)
MLM
9.5 to 0
770 to 860
17
100Base-FX
(15 km)
MLM
15 to 8
1261 to
1360
28
10
100Base-FX
(2 km)
MLM
19 to 14
1270 to
1380
14
30
10
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 190 of 243

Product Description
12.2.3 ATM Optical Interface

The ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.
Table 12-9 and Table 12-10 list the specifications of the ATM optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-9 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item
Specification
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Classification code
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Transmission distance
(km)
0 to 2
2 to 20
20 to 60
60 to 80
80 to 100
(nm)
1260 to
1360
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
MLM
MLM
MLM/SL
M
SLM
SLM
Mean launched power

(dBm)
19 to
14
15 to 8
5 to 0
5 to 0
3 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
31
28
34
34
34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
14
10
10
10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
10
8.2
10
10
10
Table 12-10 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 1500
Item
Specification
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Classification code
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
2 to 20
20 to 50
50 to 80
80 to 100
(nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to 1580
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Mean launched
power (dBm)
-15 to -8
-3 to 2
-3 to 2
-3 to 2
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
28
28
28
34
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 191 of 243

Product Description
Item
Specification
Minimum overload
(dBm)
13
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
10.5
12.2.4 Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M.
Table 12-11 lists the safety classes of lasers used for the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-11 Laser safety class
Laser Safety Class
Board
CLASS 1
N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N3SL16A,

N1SF16, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4, R1SL4, N1SLQ4,
N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, R1SLD4,
N1SLT1, N1SLQ1A, N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, R1SLQ1, N1SL1,
N1SL1A, N2SL1, R1SL1, N2SLO1, N1EGT2, N2EGS2,
N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N2EGR2, N2EMR0, N1ADL4,
N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1, N1MST4, N1OU08, N2OU08,
N1EFF8, Q2CXL1, Q3CXL1, Q2CXL4, Q3CXL4, Q2CXL16,
Q3CXL16, R1CXLL1, R1CXLD1, R1CXLQ1, R1CXLL4,
R1CXLD4, R1CXLQ4, R1CXLL16
CLASS 1M
BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA, N1FIB, ROP, N1MR2A,

N1MR2B, N1MR2C, N1LWX, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2,
TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4
12.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces
and auxiliary interfaces.
12.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types.
Table 12-12 lists the specifications of the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
1500.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 192 of 243

Product Description
Table 12-12 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces

Interface Type
1544
kbit/s
2048
kbit/s
34368
kbit/s
44736
kbit/s
139264
kbit/s
155520
kbit/s
Code
B8ZS,
AMI
HDB3
HDB3
B3ZS
CMI
CMI
Signal bit rate

at the output
interface
ITU-T
G.703-compliant
ITU-T G.703-compliant
Attenuation
tolerance at the
input interface
Frequency
deviation
tolerance at the
input interface
Anti-interferenc
e capability of
input interface
12.3.2 DDN Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports DDN interfaces.
Table 12-13 lists the DDN interface types.
Table 12-13 DDN interface types
Interface Type
Description
Standard
Framed E1
interface type
Framed E1
signal
Physical and electrical features comply with

ITU-T G.703. The frame structure complies
with ITU-T G.704.
N x 64 kbit/s
interface
V.35 interface
Complies with ITU-T V.35.
V.24 interface
Complies with ITU-T V.24.
X.21 interface
Complies with ITU-T X.21.
RS-449
interface
Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A,

RS-422A).
RS-530
interface
Complies with EIA RS-530.
RS-530A
interface
Complies with EIA RS-530A.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 193 of 243

Product Description
12.3.3 Auxiliary Interface

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.
RS-232 Interfaces
Table 12-14 lists the specifications of the RS-232 electrical interfaces.
The RS-232 interfaces are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the EOW or S1 and
S2 interfaces on the AMU.
Table 12-14 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces
Item
Specification
Bit rate
19.2 kbit/s to the maximum
Mode
RS-232 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical level
5 V to 15 V
RS-422 Interfaces
Table 12-15 lists the specifications of the RS-422 electrical interfaces.
The RS-422 interfaces are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the EOW or S1 and
S2 interfaces on the AMU.
Table 12-15 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces
Item
Specification
Bit rate
19.2 kbit/s to the maximum
Mode
RS-422 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical level
2.0 V
Orderwire Phone Interface

Table 12-16 lists the specifications of the orderwire phone interfaces.
Table 12-16 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface
Item
Specification
Speech channel interface

Impedance
600 ohms
Bandwidth
300 Hz to 3400 Hz
Operating current
18 mA
Input gain
4/0/0 dB
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 194 of 243

Product Description
Item
Specification
Output gain
0/7/0 dB
Signaling
DTMF compliant with ITU-T Q.23
12.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500
complies with related ITU-T Recommendations.
12.4.1 Clock Interface Type

The OptiX OSN 1500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output
interfaces.
Table 12-17 lists the clock features of the OptiX OSN 1500.
Table 12-17 Clock features
Clock Type
Feature
External
synchronization
source
OptiX OSN 1500A:

Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock
inputs
OptiX OSN 1500B:
inputs
inputs
Synchronizatio
n output
OptiX OSN 1500A:

outputs
OptiX OSN 1500B:
outputs
outputs
12.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance

The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with
ITU-T G.813.
Table 12-18 lists the timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 1500
equipment.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 195 of 243

Product Description
Table 12-18 Timing and synchronization performance

Output Jitter
Output Frequency of Internal

Oscillator in the Free-Run Mode
Long-Term Phase Variation

in the Locked Mode
G.813
compliant
G.813 compliant
G.813 compliant
12.5 Transmission Performance

The transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 1500 complies with ITU-T standards.
Table 12-19 lists the performance of the output jitter and bit error in an SDH/PDH
network.
Table 12-19 Transmission performance
Jitter at STM-N
Interface
Jitter at PDH Interface
Bit Error
G.813/G.825 compliant
G.823/G.783 compliant
G.826 compliant
12.6 Timeslot Numbering

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12.
Table 12-20 and Table 12-21 list the details.
Table 12-20 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I)
TUG2 (7-1)
TUG2
(7-2)
TU-3 (3-1)
TU-3 (3-2)
22
23
24
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
8
TU-3 (3-3)
43
44
45
4
6
4
7
4
8
4
9
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
TUG2
(7-3)
TUG (7-4)
TUG (7-5)
TUG (7-6)
TUG
(7-7)
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
9
3
0
3
1
3
2
3
3
3
4
3
5
3
6
3
7
3
8
3
9
4
0
4
1
4
2
5
0
5
1
5
2
5
3
5
4
5
5
5
6
5
7
5
8
5
9
6
0
6
1
6
2
6
3
Page 196 of 243

Product Description
Table 12-21 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II)

TUG2 (7-1)
TUG2
(7-2)
TUG2
(7-3)
TUG2
(7-4)
TUG2
(7-5)
TUG2
(7-6)
TUG2
(7-7)
TU-3 (3-1)
22
43
25
46
2
8
4
9
1
0
3
1
5
2
1
3
3
4
5
5
1
6
3
7
5
8
1
9
4
0
6
1
TU-3 (3-2)
23
44
26
47
2
9
5
0
1
1
3
2
5
3
1
4
3
5
5
6
1
7
3
8
5
9
2
0
4
1
6
2
TU-3 (3-3)
24
45
27
48
3
0
5
1
1
2
3
3
5
4
1
5
3
6
5
7
1
8
3
9
6
0
2
1
4
2
6
3
12.7 Power Supply Specification

The OptiX OSN 1500 supports the input of 48 V or 60 V DC power supply.
Table 12-22 lists the specifications of the power supply.
Table 12-22 Power supply specifications
Item
Specification
Power supply mode
DC power supply
Nominal voltage
48 V or 60 V
Voltage range
38.4 V to 57.6 V or 48 V to 72 V
Maximum power
consumption
OptiX OSN 1500A: 200 W
Maximum current
OptiX OSN 1500A: 4.5 A
OptiX OSN 1500B: 280 W
OptiX OSN 1500B: 6 A
12.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards

Different boards have different power consumption and weight.
Table 12-23 lists the power consumption and weight of the boards.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 197 of 243

Product Description
Table 12-23 Power consumption and weight of the boards

Board
Power Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board
Power Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
SDH Processing Boards

N1SLT1
15
1.2
N1SLQ4
16
1.0
N1SLQ1
15
1.0
N1SLQ4A
17
1.0
N1SLQ1A
17
1.0
N2SLQ4
16
1.0
N2SLQ1
15
1.0
N1SLD4
15
1.0
R1SLQ1
12
0.54
N1SLD4A
17
1.0
N1SL1,
N2SL1
14
1.0
N2SLD4
15
1.0
N1SL1A
17
1.0
R1SLD4
11
0.5
R1SL1
10
0.5
N1SL4,
N2SL4
15
1.0
N1SF16
26
1.1
N1SL4A
17
1.0
N1SL16,
N2SL16
20
1.1
R1SL4
10
0.5
N3SL16
22
1.1
N1SL16A,
N2SL16A
20
1.1
N1SEP1
17
1.0
N3SL16A
17
0.9
PDH Processing Boards

N1PQM
22
1.0
N2PQ3
13
0.9
N1SPQ4
24
0.9
N1PL3
15
1.0
N2SPQ4
24
0.9
N1PL3A
15
1.1
N1PQ1
19
1.0
N2PL3
12
0.9
N2PQ1
13
1.0
N1PD3
19
1.1
R1PL1A
R1PL1B
0.5
N2PD3
12
0.9
R1PD1
15
0.5
N2PD3
12
0.9
R2PD1
10
0.6
N1DXA
10
0.8
N1DX1
15
1.0
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 198 of 243

Product Description
Board
Power Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board
Power Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Interface Boards and Protection Switching Boards

N1EU08
11
0.4
N1ETS8
0 (before the TPS

switching); 3 (after
the TPS switching)
0.4
N1MU04
0.4
N1TSB4
0.3
N1OU08
0.4
N1TSB8
0 (before the TPS

the TPS switching)
0.3
N2OU08
0.4
N1C34S
0 (before the TPS

the TPS switching)
0.3
N1EU04
0.4
N1D12S
0 (before the TPS

the TPS switching)
0.4
R1L75S
0.3
N1D34S
0 (before the TPS

the TPS switching)
0.4
R1L12S
0.2
N1D75S
0 (before the TPS

the TPS switching)
0.4
N1DM12
0 (before the TPS

switching); 8 (after the
TPS switching)
0.5
N1D12B
0.3
N1ETF8
0.4
Data Processing Boards

N1EGS4
70
1.1
N1EFF8
0.4
N3EGS4
70
1.1
N1EFS0
35
1.0
N2EGR2
40
1.1
N2EFS0
35
1.0
N2EGS2
43
1.0
N4EFS0
35
1.0
N1EGT2
29
0.9
N1EFS4
30
1.0
N2EMR0
50
1.2
N2EFS4
30
1.0
N1EMS4
65 (without an
interface board); 75
(with an interface
board)
1.1
N1ADQ1
41
1.0
R1EFT4
14
0.5
N1ADL4
41
0.9
N1EFT8
26
1.0
N1IDL4
41
1.0
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 199 of 243

Product Description
Board
Power Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
Board
Power Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N1EFT8A
26
1.0
N1IDQ1
41
1.0
N1MST4
26
0.9
Cross-connect and System Control Boards

Q2CXL16,
Q2CXL4,
Q2CXL1
40
1.1
R1CXLQ4,
R1CXLQ1,
R1CXLD4,
R1CXLD1,
R1CXLL16,
R1CXLL4,
R1CXLL1
50
1.0
Q3CXL16,
Q3CXL4,
Q3CXL1
46
1.2
N1LWX
30
1.1
TN11CMR2
0.2
0.8
N1MR2B
1.0
TN11CMR4
0.2
0.9
N1MR2C
1.0
N1FIB
0.4
TN11MR2
0.2
0.9
TN11OBU1
16
1.3
TN11MR4
0.2
0.9
R1FAN
20
1.0
N1BA2
20
1.0
AUX
19
1.0
N1BPA
20
1.0
R1AMU
0.5
N2BPA
11
1.2
EOW
10
0.4
PIU, PIUA
1.3
Other Boards
12.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The OptiX OSN 1500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300
127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) related tests.
Table 12-24 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.
Table 12-24 EMC test results
Item
Standard
Radiated emission
CISPR22 Class
AEN55022 Class A
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 200 of 243

Product Description
Item
Standard
Conducted emission for DC port
CISPR22 Class A
EN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for signal ports
CISPR22 Class A
EN55022 Class A
Immunity to Radiated
Electromagnetic Field
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Immunity to electrostatic discharge
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz2700 MHz: 10

V/m)
IEC 61000-4-2 (Air Discharge:8 kV;

Contact Discharge:6 kV)
Immunity to electrical fast transient
bursts for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Immunity to electrical fast transient

bursts for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2
Immunity to surges for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-4(1 kV)
IEC 61000-4-4(1 kV)
IEC 61000-4-5(Line to Line: 1 kV, Line to

Ground: 2 kV)
Immunity to surges for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3

IEC 61000-4-5(1 kV)
Immunity to continuous conducted

interference for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Immunity to continuous conducted

interference for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Immunity To Continuous Voltage dips

and Short Interruption and Voltage
Variation for DC Power Port
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
IEC 61000-4-6(10 V)
IEC 61000-4-6(10 V)
IEC 61000-4-29
Page 201 of 243

Product Description
12.10 Safety Certification

The OptiX OSN 1500 has received several safety certifications.
Table 12-25 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 1500 has received.
Table 12-25 Safety certifications
Item
Standard
Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC)
CISPR22 Class A
CISPR24
EN55022 Class A
EN50024
ETSI EN 300 386 Class A
ETSI ES 201 468
CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A
ICES 003 Class A
AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A
GB9254 Class A
VCCI Class A
Safety
IEC 60950-1
IEC/EN41003
EN 60950-1
UL 60950-1
CSA C22.2 No 60950-1
AS/NZS 60950-1
BS EN 60950-1
IS 13252
GB4943
Laser safety
FDA rules
21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11
IEC60825-1
IEC60825-2
EN60825-1
EN60825-2
GB7247
Health
ICNIRP Guideline
1999-519-EC
EN 50385
OET Bulletin 65
IEEE Std C95.1
Environment protection
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
RoHS
Page 202 of 243

Product Description
12.11 Environmental Specification

The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper environment for normal operation.
The OptiX OSN 1500 can operate normally for a long term in the environment defined
in Table 12-26.
Table 12-26 Environment specifications for long-term operation
Item
Range
Altitude
4000 m
Air pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature
0 to 45
Relative humidity
10% to 90%
Anti-seismic performance
ETS300-019-2-3-AMD
12.12 Environment Requirement

The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a different environment for storage, transportation and
operation. This section lists the environment requirements.
The following international standards are taken as the reference for specifying the
environment requirements.
ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly

temperature-controlled location
NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS)

Requirements: Physical Protection
12.12.1 Environment for Storage

The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for storage.
Climate
Table 12-27 lists the climate requirements for storage.
Table 12-27 Climate requirements for storage
Item
Range
Altitude
4000 m
Air pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature
40 to +70
Temperature change rate
1 /min
Relative humidity
5% to 100%
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 203 of 243

Product Description
Item
Range
Solar radiation
1120 W/s2
Heat radiation
600 W/s2
Air flowing speed
30 m/s
Waterproof Requirement
The requirement for storing the equipment on the customer site is that generally, the
equipment must be stored indoors.
There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment carton. The
equipment should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water
leakage, such as near the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that following conditions are met.
The carton must be intact.
Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the carton.
There should be no water on the ground where the carton is placed.
The carton must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.
Biological Environment
Avoid the growth of microbes, such as eumycete and mycete.
Take anti-rodent measures.
Air Cleanness
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or

corrosive dust.
The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements
defined by Table 12-28.
Table 12-28 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage
Mechanical Active Substance
Content
Suspending dust
5.00 mg/m3
Precipitable dust
20.0 mg/m2h
Gravel
300 mg/m3
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements
Page 204 of 243

Product Description
Table 12-29 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage
Chemical Active Substance
Content
SO2
0.30 mg/m3
H2S
0.10 mg/m3
NO2
0.50 mg/m3
NH3
1.00 mg/m3
Cl2
0.10 mg/m3
HCl
0.10 mg/m3
HF
0.01 mg/m3
O3
0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-30 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.
Table 12-30 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage
Item
Sub-Item
Range
Random
vibration
Acceleration
spectral density
0.02 m2/s3
Frequency range
5 Hz to 20 Hz
20 Hz to 50 Hz
50 Hz to 100 Hz
dB/oct
+12
-12
12.12.2 Environment for Transportation

The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for transportation.
Climate
Table 12-31 lists the climate requirements for transportation.
Table 12-31 Climate requirements for transportation
Item
Range
Altitude
4000 m
Air pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature
40 to +70
1/min
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 205 of 243

Product Description
Item
Range
Relative humidity
5% to 100%
Solar radiation
1120 W/s2
Heat radiation
600 W/s2
Air flowing speed
30 m/s
Waterproof Requirement
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
The carton must be intact.
Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the carton.
There should be no water in the transportation tool.
Air Cleanness

corrosive dust.
Table 12-32 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during

transportation
Mechanical Active Substance
Content
Suspending dust
No requirement
Precipitable dust
3.0 mg/m2h
Gravel
100 mg/m3
Table 12-33 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation
Content
SO2
1.00 mg/m3
H2S
0.50 mg/m3
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 206 of 243

Product Description
Content
NO2
1.00 mg/m3
NH3
3.00 mg/m3
Cl2
HCl
0.50 mg/m3
HF
0.03 mg/m3
O3
0.10 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-34 lists the requirements for transporting the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment.
Table 12-34 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation
Item
Sub-Item
Range
Random vibration
Acceleration spectral
density
1 m2/s3
3 dBA
Frequency range
5 Hz to 20 Hz
20 Hz to 200 Hz
Impact response spectrum

I (sample weight > 50 kg)
100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times on

each surface
Impact response spectrum

II (sample weight 50 kg)
180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times on

each surface
Weight (kg)
Height (m)
<10
1.0
<15
1.0
<20
0.8
<30
0.6
<40
0.5
<50
0.4
<100
0.3
>100
0.1
Impact
Fall-off
NOTE
Impact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the
equipment that is spurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from the top, which
the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 207 of 243

Product Description
12.12.3 Environment for Operation

The OptiX OSN 1500 requires a proper climate for operation.
Climate
Table 12-35 and Table 12-36 list the climate requirements for operation of the OptiX
OSN 1500.
Table 12-35 Requirements for temperature and humidity
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Long-term
operation
Short-term operation
Long-term
operation
Short-term
operation
0 to 45
5 to 55
10% to 90%
5% to 95%
NOTE
The temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4
m in front of the equipment. Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of
the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated working time every year does
not exceed 15 days.
Table 12-36 Other climatic requirements

Item
Range
Altitude
4000 m
Air pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
30/h
Solar radiation
700 W/s2
Heat radiation
600 W/s2
Air flowing speed
5 m/s
Air Cleanness

corrosive dust.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 208 of 243

Product Description
Table 12-37 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance
Mechanical Active
Substance
Content
Dust particle
3 x 105 particles/m3
Suspending dust
0.2 mg/m3
Precipitable dust
1.5 mg/m2h
Gravel
20 mg/m3
Table 12-38 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation
Content
SO2
0.30 mg/m3
H2S
0.10 mg/m3
NH3
1.00 mg/m3
Cl2
0.10 mg/m3
HCl
0.10 mg/m3
HF
0.01 mg/m3
O3
0.05 mg/m3
NOX
0.50 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 12-39 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation.
Table 12-39 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation
Item
Sub-Item
Range
Sinusoidal
vibration
Velocity
5 mm/s
Acceleration
2 m/s2
Frequency range
5 Hz to 62 Hz
62 Hz to 200 Hz
Impact response
spectrum II
Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times

on each surface
Static load
0 kPa
Impact
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 209 of 243

Product Description
Item
Sub-Item
Range
NOTE
Impact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by an
equipment that is spurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from the top, which
the equipment with package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 210 of 243

Product Description
Compliant Standards
This chapter lists the standards that OptiX OSN 1500 complies with.
A.1 ITU-T Recommendations

Table A-1 ITU-T recommendations
Recommendation
Description
G.652
Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
G.655
Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber and

cable
G.661
Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical fiber
amplifiers
G.662
Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
G.663
Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems
G.671
Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems
G.691
Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH systems with optical
amplifiers
G.692
Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
G.694.1
Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
G.694.2
Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid
G.702
Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703
Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces
G.704
Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44736kbit/s
hierarchical levels
G.7041
Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042
Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
G.707
Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 211 of 243

Product Description
Recommendation
Description
G.709
Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
G.773
Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems
G.774 1-5
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the

network element view
G.775
Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect detection and
clearance criteria
G.783
Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional

blocks
G.784
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
G.803
Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

(SDH)
G.811
Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
G.812
Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in

synchronization networks
G.813
Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
G.823
The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the
2048kbit/s hierarchy.
G.824
1544kbit/s hierarchy.
G.825
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).
G.826
Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate
digital paths at or above the primary rate.
G.831
Management capabilities of transport networks based on the Synchronous

Digital Hierarchy (SDH).
G.841
Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
G.842
Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures
G.957
Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital

hierarchy
G.958
Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical
fiber cables
I.121
Broadband aspects of ISDN
I.150
B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional characteristics
I.311
B-ISDN general network aspects
I.321
B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
I.361
B-ISDN ATM layer specification
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 212 of 243

Product Description
Recommendation
Description
I.630
ATM protection switching
M.3010
Principles for a telecommunication management network
Q.811
Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Q.812
Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
V.24
List of definitions for interchange circuits between data terminal equipment

(DTE) and data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
V.35
Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108 kHz group band
circuits
V.28
Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current interchange circuits
X.21
Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) which is

designed for interfacing to synchronous V-Series modems
X.86
Ethernet over LAPS
A.2 IEEE Standards

Table A-2 IEEE standards
Standard
Description
IEEE 802.17
Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.1ad
Virtual bridged local area networks Amendment 4: Provider bridges
IEEE 802.1ag
Connectivity fault management
IEEE 802.1d
Media access control (MAC) bridges
IEEE 802.1q
Virtual bridged local area networks
IEEE 802.3
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access

method and physical layer specification
IEEE 802.3ad
Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ah
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access

method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u
Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, medium attachment

units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type 100Base-T
IEEE 802.3x
Standards for local and metropolitan area networks: specification for 802.3 full
duplex operation
IEEE 802.3z
Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater and

management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 213 of 243

Product Description
A.3 IETF Standards

Table A-3 IETF standards
Standard
Description
RFC 2615 (1999)
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH
RFC 1662 (1994)
PPP in HDLC-like Framing
RFC 1661 (1994)
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1990
The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 2514
Definitions of textual conventions and

OBJECT-IDENTITIES for ATM management
RFC 3031
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture
RFC 3032
MPLS Label Stack Encoding
A.4 ANSI Standards

Table A-4 ANSI related standards
Standard
Description
ANSI X3.296
SBCON (ESCON): FICON
ANSI X3.230
Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)
A.5 Environment Related Standards

Table A-5 Environment related standards
Standard
Description
IEC 60068-2
Basic environmental testing procedures
IEC 60068-3-3
Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments
IEC 60721-2-6
Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake

vibration
IEC 60721-3-1
Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3:

Classification of groups of environmental parameters and
their severities - Section 1: Storage
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 214 of 243

Product Description
Standard
Description
IEC 60721-3-3
Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3:

Classification of groups of environmental parameters and
their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at
weatherprotected locations
ETS 300 019-1-1
Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage

locations
ETS 300 019-1-3:
Partly temperature-controlled location
NEBS
GR-63-CORE
Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements:

Physical protection
A.6 EMC Standards

Table A-6 EMC related standards
Standard
Description
IEC 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and

measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity
test
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and

measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-3

measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst
immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-4

measurement techniques-Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-5

measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted
disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-6
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing

and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot
interruptions and voltage variations on d.c. input power
port immunity tests
IEC 61000-4-29
EN 61000-4-29
CISPR 22/EN 55022
Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance

characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN 55024
Information technology equipment-immunity

charateristics-Limits and methods of measurement
ETSI EN 300386
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters

(ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;
ElectroMagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 215 of 243

Product Description
Standard
Description
ETSI EN 201468
Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters

(ERM); Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of
service in specific applications
ETSI EN 300132-2
Power supply interface at the input totelecommunications

equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc).
A.7 Safety Compliance Standards

Table A-7 Safety compliance related standards
Standard
Description
EN 60950
Information technology equipment - safety
IEC 950
Safety of information technology equipment including

electrical business equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2
No 1-M94
Audio, video and similar electronic equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2
No 950-95
Safety of information technology equipment
73/23/EEC
Low voltage directive
UL 60950-1
Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
A.8 Protection Standards

Table A-8 Protection related standards
Standard
Description
IEC 61024-1
Protection of structures against lightning
IEC 61312-1
Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I:

general principles
IEC 61000-4-5
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and

measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test
ITU-T K.11
Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
ITU-T K.20
Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to

overvoltages and overcurrents
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 216 of 243

Product Description
Standard
Description
ITU-T K.27
Bonding configurations and earthing inside a

telecommunication building
ITU-T K.41
Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication

centres to surge overvoltages
A.9 ASON Standards

Table A-9 ASON related standards
Standard
Description
G.807
Requirements for automatic switched transport networks

(ASTN)
G.8080
Architecture for the automatically switched optical network

(ASON)
G.7712
Architecture and specification of data communication network
G.7713
Distributed call and connection management (DCM) based on

PNNI
G.7714
Protocol for automatic discovery in SDH and OTN networks
G.7715
ASON routing architecture and requirements for link state

protocols
G.7716
Control plane initial establishment, reconfiguration and

recovery
G.7717
Connection admission control
G.7718
Framework for ASON management
RFC 3471
(GMPLS)
Signaling functional description
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 217 of 243

Product Description
Basic Principle
The basic principle includes the SDH basic principle, Ethernet basic principle, and
ATM basic principle.
B.1 Introduction to SDH

This section describes the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) levels, multiplexing
structures, frame structures, and overhead bytes.
B.1.1 SDH Levels

The first level bit rate of SDH is 155520 kbit/s. Signals of higher levels can be
generated by interleaving N signals of the base SDH level (N=4, 16, 64).
See Table B-1.
Table B-1 SDH levels and the corresponding bit rates
SDH level
Bit rate (kbit/s)
STM-1
155520
STM-4
622080
STM-16
2488320
STM-64
9953280
STM-64 (out-of-band FEC)
10664228
B.1.2 Multiplexing Structure

The multiplexing structure of the equipment complies with the requirements specified
in the ITU-T Recommendations.
The multiplexing structure of OptiX OSN products series is shown in Figure B-1.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 219 of 243

Product Description
Figure B-1 Multiplexing structure

STM-64
64
STM-16
16
AU-4-64c
VC-4-64c
C4-64c
AU-4-16c
VC-4-16c
C4-16c
AU-4-4c
VC-4-4c
C4-4c
AU-4
VC-4
16
STM-4
4
STM-1
AUG-1
C-4
3
3
Pointer
justification
TUG-3
AU-3
TU-3
VC-3
VC-3
C-3
TUG-2
Multiplexing
Aligning
Mapping
TU-12
VC-12
C-12
TU-11
VC-11
C-11
B.1.3 Basic Frame Structure

The SDH basic frame structure consists of the RSOH, MSOH, POH, AU pointer, and
payload.
Figure B-2 shows the STM-N frame structure.
Figure B-2 STM-N frame structure
270 X N columns (bytes)
Regenerator section overhead

RSOH
2
3
4
Administrative unit pointer (s) AU-PTR
5
6
7
Multiplex section overhead

MSOH
High-order path overhead POH
STM-N payload
Transmission direction
9 rows
Payload
Frame n-1
Frame n
Frame n+1
Information code stream
9 X 270 X N bytes
Frame cycle: 125 s
Scrambler: X 7 + X 6 +1
T=125 s
B.1.4 SOH Description

The SOH bytes include STM-1 SOH bytes, STM-4 SOH bytes, STM-16 SOH bytes,
and STM-64 SOH bytes.
STM-1 SOH
Figure B-3 shows the structure of STM-1 SOH.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 220 of 243

Product Description
Figure B-3 STM-1 SOH

9 columns
*
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0
RSOH
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3 Serial
1
Serial
2
AU-PTR
9
rows
B2 B2 B2 K1
D4
Serial
4
K2
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
MSOH
Serial
3
M1 E2
Bytes reserved for national use
Unscrambled bytes
Media dependent bytes
Note: All unmarked bytes are reserved for

future international standardization
(for media dependent,additional national use
and other purpose).
STM-4 SOH
36 columns
* Z0
* Z0
*
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 J0 Z0
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
*
RSOH
AU-PTR
9
rows
B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1
K2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
MSOH
S1
D12
M1
E2

x
Unscrambled bytes
*
Note: All unmarded bytes are reserved for future international standardization
(for media dependent, additional national use and other purpose).
STM-16 SOH
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 221 of 243

Product Description

144 columns
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
J0
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
9
rows
*
Z0
AU-PTR
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
K1
K2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E2
S1

M1
x
Unscrambled bytes
*
STM-64 SOH
576 columns
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A2
B1
E1
D1
D2
A2
A2
A2
A2
A2
J0
*
Z0
F1
D3
AU-PTR
9
rows
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
B2
D4
K1
K2
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E2
S1
x
*

Unscrambled bytes
M1
SOH Bytes Description

Table B-2 SOH bytes description
Byte
Description
A1, A2
Framing byte (A1 = F6H, A2 = 28H)
B1
Regenerator section error monitoring BIP-8 byte
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 222 of 243

Product Description
Byte
Description
B2
Multiplex section error monitoring BIP-24N byte
D1, D2 and D3
Regenerator section DCC channel byte, 192 kbit/s
D4D12
Multiplex section DCC channel byte, 576 kbit/s
E1
Regenerator section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s
E2
Multiplex section orderwire byte, 64 kbit/s
F1
User channel byte (to provide temporary data/voice

channel connections for special maintenance purpose)
H1, H2
Administrative unit pointer byte
H3
Positive or negative justification opportunity byte
J0
Regenerator section trace byte
K1, K2 (b1b5)
Multiplex section automatic protection switching (APS)

channel byte
K2 (b6b8)
Multiplex section remote defect indication (MS-RDI) byte
M1
Multiplex section remote error indication (MS-REI) byte
S1 (b5b8)
Synchronization status byte
Serial 14
Broadcast data byte
Others
To be determined
B.1.5 Path Overhead (POH) Bytes Description

The POH bytes include the higher order POH bytes and lower order POH bytes.
Higher Order Path Overhead Description

Table B-3 VC-3/VC-4/VC-4-xc POH bytes description
Byte
Description
J1
Path trace byte
B3
Path BIP-8 byte
C2
Signal label byte
G1
Path status byte
F2, F3
Path user channels byte
H4
Position indicator byte
K3 (b1-b4)
Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 223 of 243

Product Description
Byte
Description
K3 (b5-b8)
Spare byte
N1
Network operator byte
NOTE
The VC-4 POH is located in the first column of the 9-row in the 261-column VC-4 structure.
The VC-4-xc POH is located in the first column of the 9-row in the 261 x X-column VC-4-Xc
structure (cascaded by X VC-4s).
Lower Order Path Overhead Description

Table B-4 VC-12 POH bytes description
Byte
Description
V5
V5 byte (error checking, signal label and path status)
J2
Path trace byte
N2
Network operator byte
K4
Automatic protection switching (APS) channel byte
B.2 Introduction to ATM

This section describes the ATM cell structure and provides an overview of the ATM
technology.
B.2.1 Introduction to ATM

The OptiX OSN product series can transmit, converge, and forward ATM services.
Definition of ATM
The asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a cell-based technology, which consists of
the transmission, multiplexing, and switching technologies. The switching technology
of the ATM combines the advantages of packet switching and circuit switching. The
ATM adopts the statistical multiplexing mode to realize fast packet switching. In this
way, the ATM ensures the bandwidth utilization efficiency, and supports the real-time
services of high rates and low rates.
Advantages of ATM
Sharing and statistic multiplexing of line bandwidth
Capable of carrying multiple types of services and providing Quality of Service

(QoS) service
High-speed hardware switching because of fixed cell length
Mature in technology and high standardization
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 224 of 243

Product Description
Extensive support from the telecommunication field
Good network interconnection and interworking capability
In the OSN product series, inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA) technology is used to
transmit ATM services. That is, a high-speed ATM link is transmitted over multiple
low-speed physical links. For example, three E1s are used to transmit one 6 Mbit/s
ATM link through IMA technology.
B.2.2 ATM Cell Structure

An ATM cell is of a fixed length, which is 53 bytes. An ATM cell consists of the cell
header and cell payload.
Figure B-7 shows the ATM cell structure.
Figure B-7 ATM cell structure
8 7 6 5 4
Header
(5 bytes)
3 2
GFC
VPI
VPI
VCI
8 7 6 5 4
ATM cell
VCI
VPI
VPI
VCI
VCI
VCI
Payload
(48 bytes)
3 2
PT
VCI
CLP
HEC
UNI header structure
PT CLP
HEC
NNI header structure
GFC: general flow control

VPI : virtual path identification
VCI : virtual channel identification
PT : payload type
CLP : cell loss priority
HEC : header error control
UNI : user network interface
NNI : network node interface
The contents of the ATM cell header at the UNI are slightly different from the contents
of the ATM cell header at the NNI. The difference is that the ATM cell header at the
UNI contains GFC requirements.
B.3 Introduction to Ethernet

This section describes the Ethernet basic principle and frame structure.
B.3.1 Basic Technologies

The equipment supports the transmission of Ethernet services.
Half-Duplex CSMA/CD
According to the initial design objective of Ethernet, the computers and other digital
equipment are connected through a shared physical line. The computers and digital
equipment connected in this way must enter the physical line in the half-duplex mode.
In addition, the design must provide a mechanism to detect and avoid conflict, and to
prevent equipment contending for the line at the same time. This is called CSMA/CD.
A piece of terminal equipment detects the status of the shared line continuously and
transmits data only in the idle status. Otherwise, it waits until the line is idle. At this
time, if another piece of equipment transmits data, the data sent by the two inevitably
conflicts, making the signal on the line unstable. After detecting the conflict, the
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 225 of 243

Product Description
terminal equipment stops transmitting the data quickly and then sends a succession of
interfering pulse. After waiting for a period of time, it sends the data again.
The purpose of sending the interfering pulse is to notify the other equipment, that is,
the equipment that sends the data at the same time, that a conflict occurs on the line.
The waiting time after detection of conflict is random but gradually increases.
Full-Duplex Ethernet and Ethernet Switch

In 1990, the appearance of the 10BAST-T Ethernet based on the twisted pair cable is
the most important event in the history of Ethernet. Using twisted pair cable as the
transmission medium of Ethernet not only increases the flexibility and reduces the
cost, but also introduces the full duplex mode, which is an efficient operation mode.
In the full-duplex mode, the data is transmitted and received simultaneously. The
traditional network equipment hub does not support full-duplex, because inside the
hub is a bus, over which data is transmitted and received, therefore there is no way for
full-duplex communication. To achieve full-duplex, a new type of equipment namely
the switch must be introduced.
The switch and the hub are the same in appearance. They both have multiple ports,
each of which connects to the terminal equipment and other multiple-port equipment.
Instead of a shared bus, there is a digital cross-connect network inside the switch,
which temporarily connects every terminal, enabling the terminals to transmit data
independently. In addition, the switch sets a buffer area for each port, storing the data
transmitted from terminals temporarily, and performs switching after idle resources are
available. It is the appearance of the switch that changes the original 10/100 Mbit/s
shared structure to 20/200 Mbit/s exclusive structure, greatly enhancing the
transmission efficiency. In addition, certain software can be added to the switch to
implement additional services, such as VLAN, priority, redundant link.
Auto Negotiation
In actual situations, Ethernet can transmit data in the full duplex mode or half duplex
mode at the rate of 10 Mbit/s, or 100 Mbit/s, through type 5 twisted pair cable or type 3
twisted pair. If each terminal equipment is configured manually, it will be difficult to
maintain the equipment. Auto negotiation provides a solution for addressing this
problem.
Through auto negotiation, the equipment at both ends of a physical link selects a
transmission mode automatically by exchanging information. Auto negotiation is
based on the Ethernet connected by using a twisted pair cable, which is only effective
for such an Ethernet. The contents of auto negotiation include the duplex mode, bit
rate, flow control. If the negotiation passes, the equipment at both ends of the link
works in the mode negotiated.
B.3.2 Ethernet Frame Structure

The OptiX OSN product series support Ethernet frame structures of three protocol
types: Ethernet_II, 802.3, and Ethernet_SNAP.
Figure B-8 shows the Ethernet frame structure of OSN product series.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 226 of 243

Product Description
Figure B-8 Ethernet frame structure

Unit: byte
6
46-1500
Data
FCS
Destination
Source MAC Protocol type
MAC
Ethernet_II
6
2
Protocol
length
Destination
Source MAC
MAC
43-1497
Data
FCS
DSAP SSAP CTL

802.3
Destination
Source MAC
MAC
Protocol
length
1
1
1
3
0xAA 0xAA CTL OC
38-1492
Protocol type
Data
4
FCS
Ethernet_SNAP
B.4 Link Aggregation

This section describes the basic principle of link aggregation and the relevant frame
structure.
B.4.1 Concepts
Link aggregation means bundling multiple physical links that are connected to one
piece of equipment. The aggregated links are considered as one link.
As shown in Figure B-9.
Figure B-9 Schematic diagram of link aggregation
traffic
B.4.2 Characteristics
Link aggregation includes manual aggregation, static aggregation, and dynamic
aggregation.
Enhancing Link Availability

In link aggregation, links back up each other dynamically. When a link breaks, the
other links can quickly provide a backup. The switching process takes place within the
aggregation. It is unrelated with other links.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 227 of 243

Product Description
Increasing Link Capacity

The aggregation technology can improve the link transmission capability economically.
Without upgrading the existing equipment, the user can obtain a data link of larger
bandwidth, which is equal to the capacity of a number of physical links. The
aggregation module allocates the traffic to different members according to a certain
algorithm to realize load balancing at link level.
Aggregation Types
There are three aggregation types: manual aggregation, static aggregation, and
dynamic aggregation.
Manual aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port does not run the link
aggregation control protocol (LACP).
Static aggregation
The aggregation is manually configured, and the port runs the LACP.
Dynamic aggregation
The LACP based on IEEE 802.3ad is used.
B.5 Introduction to MPLS

This section describes the MPLS basic principle and frame structure.
B.5.1 Overview
MPLS is short for multi-protocol label switching.
MPLS is a standard routing and switching technology platform that supports various
upper layer protocols and services
The MPLS architecture consists of the following:
Control plane, which is connectionless and implemented with the current IP

network.
Forwarding plane, also called data plane, is connection-oriented, and takes

advantage of the Layer 2 network such as ATM and frame relay.
MPLS uses a short label of fixed length to encapsulate packets, and implements fast
forwarding on the data plane. MPLS uses powerful, flexible routing functions of the IP
network on the control plane to address various new applications.
MPLS is originated from the Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4), and its core technology
can be extended to multiple network protocols, including the Internet Protocol version
6 (IPv6), Internet Packet Exchange (IPX), Appletalk, DECnet, Connectionless
Network Protocol (CLNP). "Multiprotocol" in the MPLS denotes supporting multiple
network protocols.
OSN product series support the use of MPLS on IPv4, IPv6 and IPX.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 228 of 243

Product Description
B.5.2 Encapsulation Format

The MPLS label is usually added before Layer 2 headers and Layer 3 headers. The
OptiX OSN equipment supports MPLS encapsulation formats such as MartinioE and
MatinioP.
Figure B-10 shows the two encapsulation formats. The encapsulation content is
marked in grey.
Figure B-10 MPLS encapsulation format
Unit : byte
MartinioE encapsulation format
DA
A
66
SA
A
66
0x8847 (0x8848 broadcast)

0x8847(0x8848
2
Tunnel
VC
Ethernet data
MartinioP encapsulation format

0x8847 (0x8848 broadcast))
0x8847(0x8848
2
Tunnel
Tunnel
VC
VC
Ethernet data
44
The meanings of the bytes in Figure B-10 are shown in Table B-5.
Table B-5 The meanings of the bytes in the MPLS encapsulation format
Name
Meaning
DA
Destination address
SA
Source address
Tunnel
Tunnel label
VC
Virtual channel
0x8847
MPLS Martini encapsulation format
0x8848
Broadcast frame
B.6 QinQ Principle

This section describes the QinQ basic principle and frame structure.
B.6.1 Introduction to QinQ

The QinQ is a VLAN stack embedding technology, which complies with the S-VLAN
requirements in IEEE 802.1ad. The QinQ technology supplements the VLAN
technology that complies with IEEE 802.1q.
The advantages of QinQ technology are as follows:
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 229 of 243

Product Description
Expands VLAN and alleviates VLAN resource insufficiency. For example, a VLAN
providing 4096 VLAN IDs can provide 40964096 VLANs after VLAN stacking.
Extends LAN service to WAN, connecting the client network to the carrier network
and supporting transparent transmission.
B.6.2 QinQ Data Frame Structure

The QinQ data frame involves the types of VLAN labels, which include S-VLAN labels
and C-VLAN labels.
VLAN Label Types

IEEE 802.1ad defines two VLAN label types, as shown in Figure B-11.
Customer VLAN label, defined as C-VLAN.
Server layer VLAN label, defined as S-VLAN.
Figure B-11 QinQ data frame structure

6 Bytes
Destination
MAC
6 Bytes
Source
MAC
4 Bytes
4 Bytes
S-VLAN label C-VLAN label
2 Bytes
Length/type
4 Bytes
Data
FCS
The maximum length of the frame is determined by the port attribute settings of the
equipment.
Structure of S-VLAN and C-VLAN

The 4-byte S-VLAN and C-VLAN labels can be further divided into two parts: TPID
and TCI, each of which has two bytes.
TPID
TPID indicates the type of the VLAN label. The TPID of C-VLAN is fixed to 0X8100
and that of S-VLAN is configurable, as shown in Table B-6.
Table B-6 TPID settings
Tag type
Name
ID
C-VLAN TAG
802.1Q Tag Protocol Type (802.1Q TagType)
0X8100
S-VLAN TAG
802.1Q Service Tag Type (802.1Q S Tag Type)
Configurable
C-VLAN tag (C-TAG) is used to identify the customer VLAN and is used on the VLAN
Bridge and PEB equipment.
S-VLAN tag (S-TAG) is used to identify the server VLAN and is used on the PB and
PEB equipment.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 230 of 243

Product Description
TCI
The TCI structure of S-TAG is basically the same as that of C-TAG, as shown in Figure
B-12 and Figure B-13. VLAN ID (VID) is still 12 bits, ranging from 0 to 4095. The
difference is that S-TAG introduces the concept of Drop Eligible (DE). Priority code
point (PCP), used with DE, indicates the priority of the S-TAG frame.
Figure B-12 C-TAG TCI structure
Octets:
2
PCP
Bits:
CFI
6
VID
4
Figure B-13 S-TAG TCI structure

Octets:
2
PCP
Bits:
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
DE
6
VID
4
Page 231 of 243

Product Description
Glossary
1+1 protection
A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one working
SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge.
1:N protection
A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N working

SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra traffic signal.
3R
Regeneration, Retiming, and Reshaping.
A
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A transfer mode in which the information is

organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells
containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic. It is a
protocol within the OSI layer 1. An ATM cell consists of a 5 octet header
followed by 48 octets of data.
B
Bandwidth
The value numerically equal to the lowest frequency at which the magnitude of
the baseband transfer function of an optical fiber decreases to a specified
fraction, generally to -3 dB optical (-6 dB electrical), of the zero frequency
value. The bandwidth is limited by several mechanisms: mainly modal
distortion and chromatic dispersion in multimode fibers.
BITS
Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply that minimizes the
number of synchronization links entering an office. It is sometimes referred to
as a synchronization supply unit.
Build-in WDM
A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into the OSN product
series. That is, the OSN products can add and drop several wavelengths
directly.
C
Congestion
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
The condition that exists in a network, if the capacity required for the
instantaneous traffic exceeds the bandwidth available in the network.
Page 233 of 243

Product Description
Control plane
A set of communicating entities that are responsible for the establishment of

connections including set-up, release, supervision and maintenance. A control
plane is supported by a signaling network.
Convergence
The process of developing a model of the echo path which will be used in the
echo estimator to produce the estimate of the circuit echo.
Conversion
In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA

transforms parts of a message content from one encoded information type to
another, or alters a probe so that it appears that the described messages were
modified.
D
Distributed
transaction
A transaction, parts of which may be carried out in more than one open
system.
DNI
Dual Node Interconnection. Both ring networks have two nodes that are
interconnected with each other. DNI not only provides protection for ring-cross
services but also for the failed node of two interconnected nodes. Therefore, it
improves the network availability.
E
EPL
Ethernet Private Line. An EPL service is a point-to-point interconnection

between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is
never shared between different customers.
EPLn
Ethernet Private LAN. An EPLn service is a LAN service and a private service.
Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.
EVPL
Ethernet Virtual Private Line. An EVPL service is a service that is both a line
service and a virtual private service.
EVPLn
Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network. An EVPLn service is a service

that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F
Fairness algorithm
A mechanism that enforces fairness among the nodes on the ring. It applies
only to LP and excess medium priority traffic coming from the MAC client.
Each node is assigned a weight, which allows the user to allocate more ring
bandwidth to certain nodes.
FEC
Forward error correction. It is a technology used for enhancing the reliability of

digital transmission. It can increase the transmission distance and improve the
network performance.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 234 of 243

Product Description
I
IMA
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique

involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical
fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose
rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA
group.
IMA frame
The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical
frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each
of the N links in an IMA group.
IMA group
Group of links at one end used to establish an IMA virtual link to other end.
IMA sublayer
Sublayer part of the physical layer that is located between the interface
specific Transmission Convergence (TC) sublayer and the ATM layer.
IMA virtual link
Virtual link established between two IMA units over a number of physical links
(IMA group).
ASON service
Service that is configured directly by the T2000. The service within the
transmission network is requested by the T2000 and then created by the
control plane of the NE through signaling.
IP over DCC
The IP Over DCC follows the TCP/IP telecommunications standards and

controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that
the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for
communication.
L
Loopback
The fault of each path on the optical fiber can be located by setting the
loopback for each path of the line. There are three kinds of loopback modes:
No loopback, outloop, inloop.
M
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection. The MSP function provides the capability for
switching a signal from a working section to a protection section.
Multiplexer
An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer

number of aggregate bearer channels, where the relationship between the
tributary and aggregate channels are fixed.
O
Orderwire
It establishes the voice communication among the operators and maintenance

engineers working in each working station.
Overhead
information
Auxiliary Channel Overhead Information is information that may be transferred

by an optical network layer, but which does not have to be associated with a
particular connection. An example of such an auxiliary channel is a data
communications channel used for the purposes of transferring management
data between management entities. These management entities are not trail
termination and adaptation functions.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 235 of 243

Product Description
P
Paired slot
Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on
the backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheads can be
passed through between the paired slots by using the directly connected
overhead bus. When two SDH boards form an MSP ring, the boards need to
be inserted in paired slots so that the K bytes can be passed through.
R
RPR
Resilient Packet Ring. A metropolitan area network (MAN) technology

supporting data transfer among stations interconnected in a dual-ring
configuration.
Regeneration
The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the

amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within
specified limits.
S
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport

structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over
physical transmission networks.
SNCP
SubNetwork Connection Protection. A working subnetwork connection is

replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork
connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
SNCMP
Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection. The source broadcasts services to

multiple paths, and the sink determines which service needs to be received
according to the service priority and the service quality.
SNCTP
Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection. It provides protection paths at the

VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all the services in the working
path are switched to the protection path.
SLA
Service Level Agreement. A negotiated agreement between an end user and

the service provider. Its significance varies according to the service offerings.
The SLA may include a number of attributes such as, but not limited to, traffic
contract, availability, performance, encryption, authentication, pricing and
billing mechanism .
Service plane
The service plane comprises: a) service presentation functionality being

presented to the end user; b) service implementation aspects with which the
end user interacts. For example, service invocation, control service level
agreement function. The service presentation and service implementation
aspects use the totality of the transfer capabilities including control and
management functionalities.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 236 of 243

Product Description
T
TPS
Tributary Protection Switching. A function provided by the equipment, which is

intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary
processing board.
TCM
Tandem Connection Monitor. In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is

located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the
N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport channels
on a transmission section (TCM section).
Timeslot
Single timeslot on a E1 digital interfacethat is, a 64-kbps, synchronous,

full-duplex data channel, typically used for a single voice connection.
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 237 of 243

Product Description
Acronyms and Abbreviations
This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.
A
ABR
Available Bit Rate
ADM
Add/Drop Multiplexer
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion
APS
Automatic Protection Switching
ASON
Automatically Switched Optical Network
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
B
BITS
Building Integrated Timing Supply System
BPA
Optical Booster & Pre-amplifier Unit
C
CAR
Committed Access Rate
CBR
Constant Bit Rate
CC
Continuity Check
CF
Compact Flash
CMI
Coded Mark Inversion
CR-LDP
Constrained Route Label Distribution Protocol
CSPF
Constrained Shortest Path First
D
DCC
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Data Communication Channels
Page 239 of 243

Product Description
DCE
Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DDN
Digital Data Network
DVB-ASI
Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E
ECC
Embedded Control Channel
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EPL
Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN
Ethernet Private LAN
ESCON
Enterprise Systems Connection
ETS
European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL
Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN
Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
F
FC
Fiber Channel
FE
Fast Ethernet
FEC
Forward Error Correction
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
G
GE
Gigabit Ethernet
GFP
Generic Framing Procedure
GMPLS
General Multiprotocol Label Switching
H
HDB3
High Density Bipolar of order 3 code
HDLC
High level Data Link Control
I
IEC
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
International Electrotechnical Commission
Page 240 of 243

Product Description
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF
Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol
IMA
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication

Standardization Sector
L
LACP
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAN
Local Area Network; Local Area Network
LAPS
Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB
Loopback
LCAS
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT
Local Craft Terminal
LPT
Link State Path Through
LSP
Label Switch Path
M
MAC
Media Access Control
MADM
Multi Add/Drop Multiplexer
MCF
Message Communication Function
MLM
Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
MPLS
Multiprotocol Label Switching
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection
N
NEBS
Network Equipment-Building System
nrt-VBR
Non-Real Time Variable Bite rate
NS
Network Side
NSF
Non-interrupted Service Forwarding
O
OADM
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Optical Add/drop Multiplexer
Page 241 of 243

Product Description
OAM
Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OAM&P
Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provision
OSP
OptiX Software Platform
OTM
Optical Terminal Multiplexer
P
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE
Provider Edge
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
Q
QoS
Quality of Service
R
RPR
Resilient Packet Ring
RSTP
Rapid Span Tree Protocol
rt-VBR
Real Time Variable Bite rate
RSVP-TE
Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-Engineering Extensions
S
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP
Small Form Pluggable
SLA
Service Level Agreement
SLM
Single-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
SNCP
Subnetwork Connection Protection
SNCMP
Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection
SNCTP
Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
STP
Span Tree Protocol
T
TCM
Tandem Connection Monitoring
TPS
Tributary Protection Switching
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 242 of 243

Product Description
U
UBR
Unspecified Bit Rate
V
VC
Virtual Channel
VCC
Virtual Channel Connection
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network
VP
Virtual Path
VPC
Virtual Path Connection
VPN
Virtual Private Network
W
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WTR
Wait-to-Restore
Issue 02 (2008-03-29)
Page 243 of 243

Docslide - Us Optix Osn 1500 v100r008 Product Description

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Docslide - Us Optix Osn 1500 v100r008 Product Description

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Product Description

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

About This Document

Describes the OptiX OSN 1500 and its position in the

This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiX

Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptable

Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 1500. It

Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of the

This chapter describes the DCN feature supported by the

This chapter introduces the ASON features of the OptiX

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

Describes protection modes (including equipment level

This chapter describes the clock function of the OptiX

This chapter describes main technical characteristics of

This chapter describes main technical characteristics of

This chapter describes the interface specifications,

This appendix lists international standards to which the

This appendix lists the basic principle of several

This appendix lists the terms used in this document.

The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

5 Data Features ................................................................................................................77

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

6 DCN Features .............................................................................................................. 113

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

11 Security Management ...............................................................................................181

12 Technical Specifications ..........................................................................................185

A Compliant Standards ................................................................................................. 211

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

B Basic Principle ...........................................................................................................219

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

The OptiX OSN 1500 is new generation equipment developed by Huawei

Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)

Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)

Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

Storage area network (SAN)

DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting)

Digital data network (DDN)

Automatically switched optical network (ASON)

Figure 1-1 OptiX OSN 1500A

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

Figure 1-2 OptiX OSN 1500B

OptiX OSN 9500

OptiX OSN 7500

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 3500T

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R008

Figure 1-3 Network application of the OptiX OSN 1500

OptiX OSN 9500

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 1500